Archive for January, 2014

Comparisons between Moses and Jesus and Ti and Do’s “classroom” missions

January 24, 2014

Below I have included a comment I received and my response:

Comment:
It is X-ian myth in the sense that most x-ians think it applies to them… You hear lots of preachers and republicans quoting leviticus to justify their hatred of gays. Those same preachers and republicans eat shrimp and shellfish, though..,. which was also a grevious sin.

Mosaic Law is a lot like the tediousness the Class had to deal with when doing anything (making biscuits, measuring salt, etc.) I believe that Mosaic Law had its roots in what was “at the time” commonsense heuristics to avoid disease and death… that sort of thing. The tediousness in the class was meant more to “overcome” thinking… Class members were NOT to think — at least not to think using their plant brains. But important to The Two was that apparently the “next level” valued those who could take instructions for a “task” and complete them to the letter of the instructions — hence the “check partner” concept… Mosaic Law didn’t advocate for check partners because it was more legalistic…

In the “Class”, the instructions were just to demonstrate an ability to “not think” for yourself. Mosaic Law was to show solidarity to their fatih… a grand “side effect” of the law (which jesus came to destroy btw) was to unify the Jewish people for the ages — Jews still carry on these traditions — and as such have been “insoluble” agents in any “melting pots” society has had since. Jews have maintained their traditions and identity because their law isolated them from “us”.

A group of Lubavitchem jews moved to Postville Iowa to start a Kosher slaughtering plant — and the “townies” were shocked at how unabashedly unfriendly these Jews were to them… It was a clash of cultures… the “friendly iowa” culture that wanted to embrace the Lubavitchem and the Lubavitchem that wanted nothing to do with that world.

A book was written about it and it is very interesting: Postville: A Clash of Cultures in Heartland America .

In a way, the Class was like the Hassidem

Exodus 3:14’s “I AM That I AM” as the name given to Moses from the burning bush – plus Ti and Do truthfullness

January 19, 2014

The following is my response to a comment that was claiming this Exodus verse was a “mind f**k” because of how it is recursive “I am that I am”. After this evaluation of that verse I addressed this commentor’s other statement that “Nothing Ti and Do said came true”. Thus here is my response to both:

You stimulated my look and see. In this verse the words in parentheses were added by the translators. This is often necessary because of the nature of languages where one word or figure represents a picture or idea, etc., but sometimes it seems, especially in the new testament greek re-translation that I do a lot of, different translations give different slants.

Exo 3:14 (And) God said (unto) Moses, (I) AM (THAT I) AM: (and he) said, (Thus shalt thou) say (unto the) children of Israel, (I AM hath) sent (me unto you).

It’s interesting that when I looked at this I wondered if this translation didn’t get the order right and I wondered if it should have been something like, “…Moses, I AM, thus say to the children of Israel “I AM” hath sent me to you”. As is evident none of the I’s are in the manuscript and the entire third listing of “I AM isn’t in the manuscript. So taking all the parentheses words out it would read:

God said (to) Moses, Am (that) Am said, children of Israel sent. (Funny how I remember the cartoon Popeye where he went around saying, “I am that I am”. I bet it was a Jewish writer).

Then turn the order a bit to, “God said to Moses, Am”. (in response to his question of who he should say sent him). Then “Am sent you to the Children of Israel”.

The other thing I looked at was whether the word translated as “AM” in both cases had additional options not considered. For instance, knowing a bit about this, I wondered if both, “am” and/or “exist” and/or “do” are equivalent translations. In any case with those two thoughts I looked at the other translations and 4 out of 6 said the same as we see in this king james translation but this one was much different:

Brenton Greek Septuagint (LXX Restored Names):

And God spoke to Mosheh{gr.Moses}, saying, I am THE BEING; and he said, Thus shall ye say to the children of Israel, THE BEING has sent me to you.

Strongs Hebrew dictionary lists for the English transliteration of AM as:

AM = 1961 hayah haw-yaw – a primitive root (compare ‘hava” (1933)); to exist, i.e. be or become, come to pass (always emphatic, and not a mere copula or auxiliary):–beacon, X altogether, be(-come), accomplished, committed, like), break, cause, come (to pass), do, faint, fall, + follow, happen, X have, last, pertain, quit (one-)self, require, X use.

1933 hava’ haw-vaw’ or havah {haw-vaw’}; a primitive root (compare ”avah’ (183), ‘hayah’ (1961)) supposed to mean properly, to breathe; to be (in the sense of existence):–be, X have.

This is most interesting as it brings it to the perspective that this being breaths and breath throughout the records has a direct relationship to “wind, mind aka spirit” and mind when it is from a Next Level Above Human being is relative to human mind, “pure” thus spoken of in religious terms as “holy” – having no mammalian vibrations in it as they have evolved beyond mammalian.

2) Now where you said, “Nothing Do and Ti said ever came true… and they felt bad about it, but you kids loved them and didn’t let things like that bother you”, that of course is not at all true.

You are probably referring to their saying that the students need not die to go to the Next Level, which ended up being true but by Their and the Jesus definition of “life” and “death”.

And you are probably referring to their saying that we students could anticipate their performing a demonstration of death overcome that they thought meant their physical bodies would be killed the way Jesus physical body was killed and the way many of Jesus students physical bodies were killed.

But in actuality they did demonstrate the rising from the dead twice, first from the figurative death at the hands of the media, which is what they realized the “killing” meant at that time, to which they “stood on their feet” as it says in Rev 11, even so much so that they came back into the global limelight as the Heaven’s gate “suicide” cult and as it says in prophecy, horrified those who saw them. Their exit didn’t at all resemble any of the other “suicide cults” – Jim Jones Peoples temple nor Solar Temple who all were wrought with murders and deceit and revenge and pressure and guilt, the handiwork of the discarnate Luciferians that sought to create a facsimilli of what they knew Do and Crew were considering/planning as it was no secret that Jesus “layed down his life voluntarily”, as much a classification of suicide as a coma kazi pilot or soldier that gives their life for others.

But since these can seem like excuses from a believer, how about the testimony of Hayden Hewes in he and Brad Steigers book “UFO Missionaries Extraordinary” they wrote with interviews from believers and former believers and non believers and from Bo (Do) and Peep (Ti) in 1974, 1975 and 1976. Hayden, a non-believer but one with an unusually open mind recounted his great surprise when he used a code he said Ti and Do gave him to use if he had any questions for them. Nine months after interviewing them and getting the code from them, after their story hit the press big time, Hayden used the code and by the next day he received a phone call from two students of Ti and Do who were with Ti and Do at the time. The next day Hayden was curious whether it would work again so he used the code and again he received a phone call from two other students of Ti and Do and they asked him if he wanted to meet with them, to which he said yes and within a short time were at his office doorstep. This was all spoken of on page: 73. Here is the excerpt:

Hayden says of July 13, 1974 in the office of his International UFO Bureau, Inc. in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma …,

“As the interview was ending, “Herf” gave me a simple thought-code sequence to use if I ever needed to get in touch with them to know the truth.

Shortly afterward, The Two said good-bye and walked out of the office toward the street. I accompanied them to the road and started to return to the office. I immediately turned around–and they were gone. There were no cars on the street, either parked or passing by. It appearned that they had simply vanished.”

Sawyers note: Years later in the 1980’s, Ti and Do told their student body of how this was reported in the media when they did nothing miraculous to leave Hayden but walk off. (However, one can wonder if the Next Level crew even unbeknown to anyone else cloaked Ti and Do without their knowing they were cloaked, one way to account for their apparant vanishing from Hayden. We known the Next Level Above Human has this power.

(Continuing with Hayden’s account:)

“It was not until almost fifteen months later that The Two began to hold public meetings. A great deal of media coverage was generated by their appearances at these gatherings and the message they related.

It was at this point that I decided to use the mental code to find out “the truth.” It was my understanding that it was necessary for followers to undergo death to get to the next level, but I wanted to know for sure. So I used the code while asking for the truth in the name of our Father in Heaven.

The following morning, I received a telephone call from a young man who professed to be a follower of The Two. He said he had been directed to contact me. “What do you need to know?” he asked.

After several minutes of conversation, it became plain to me that this individual did possess information that had not been related in the media. He advised me that they would always be in touch with me when I needed him.

I tried the code again that night, and the following day the young man called once again. He wanted to talk in person, so I gave him my address. Less than three minutes later, he was standing on my front porch with another individual.

*** end of excerpt from Hayden Hewes testimony ***

I can think of many things Ti and Do said that to me came true, but they will not be proof for you. They told me that spirits – discarnates were real. I believed it but I had not experienced much until some years ago when I literally, on a number of occasions, even to the other night saw spirits while I was completely awake. It’s true that two were after being awoke from sleep so some could say I was dreaming but they were nothing like any dream. I pinched myself and all. The other occasions which were more often were while awake, actually before falling asleep when the lights were off but there was just a little light form led’s and moonlight/starlight and I would struggle to know what I was seeing as they weren’t as clear as those two.

Ti and Do also told us in the early 1980’s that genes could be changed. Now perhaps they read it or watched a TV channel that suggested it, which is fine if that is where they came upon that belief. I’d be curious to know whether anybody was writing books with that in mind in the 1980’s as I know for the most part it was taught in schools that if it’s in one’s chromosomes it’s hardwired which may not be exactly the same thing as gene changeability.

They did say that they would physically die.

They said that space aliens existed and when I met them I had no interest in ufo’s or space aliens and it only dawned on me in a revelatory way that the accounts of crashed ufo’s with bodies actually happened in 1987 after Do provided the student body with the book, “Crash at Aztec” and made parts of the appendix required reading, some of which included a detailed autopsy of recovered ufo occupants that crashed presented by Leonard Stringfield. However, in 1976 while having lost contact with Ti and Do and any other students except for the one I was assigned by Ti and Do months earlier, I saw a huge distinct Z written in the sky, with straight 90 degree angles by a bright ball of light traveling as fast as a falling meteor, but with no sign of a tail or break up that encompassed the entire sky over Corpus Christi, Texas in 2-3 seconds. Of course that again was proof to me but as some deny any of the thousands of reports over thousands of years are intelligently piloted spacecrafts it is not proof to them.

Aside from these few things, there are many, many circumstantial confirmations of what they taught and said. Another comes to mind that was saying the Next Level was holding back calamities from the United States so the classroom could have the freedom to exist and be able to disseminate their information freely. Then after they left the 9-11 attack happended and the patriot act was passed which was certainly a calamity, plus some horrific storms like Katrina and Sandy and all these now common mass and school shootings all evidencing a gradual increase in calamities in the U.S. since the class has exited yet not so fast that we who are still disseminating Next Level info to the public are shut down from doing so, though that seems to be approaching.

I could go through all the fulfillments of prophecy that I believe demonstrate that Ti and Do are who they said they were.

But all in all, everything they said was true for the moment and can be seen in a true light IF one wants to. They always said, that this or that perspective was “true for now” – in other words appropriate for what the students needed. The classroom in many respects was a “follow the leader” lesson to where the leaders were Ti and Do. To the next level if we were willing to see exactly what Ti and Do said as true then we were showing the signs of having detached from our human roots of reasoning, etc. to trust in their Minds and that shows the purpose of the classroom to offer the “astronaut training program” to all who wanted it so those who pass the course could be trusted to perform service on spacecrafts with very important ramifications to our choices. They don’t want nor need anyone on their crafts who will start to tell them how to do things better but that does not at all mean They won’t require of us to use our minds to arrive at choices our Older Members would recognize as having come from their minds because they too want to draw their answers from their Older Member’s minds which is a chain of mind to the chief of chiefs.

Atheists I respect you but Darwinian Evolution sounds like archaic religion and pseudo spirituality

January 17, 2014

To follow a comment I received from a regular commenter on this blog and then my response:

Comment:

The “evolutionary level above human” is a mis-use of the term “evolutionary”… evolution uses natural selection to hone all creatures great and small… evolution requires a link between creature A and more advanced creature B.

Of course there are gaps in the evolutionary record, but with interpolation we can connect the dots and it all fits together like a glove. So elegantly!!!

What you folks talk about is maybe a colloquial use of the word “evolution” (a scientific term btw… I thought you didn’t believe in science/proof — space aliens and all)

But what you folks talk about is not evolutiion — not even metamorphosis (another term used frequently on the tapes).

Maybe originally, Do thought of it in terms of evolution — but obviously, suicide isn’t nature’s way of evolving… it is nature’s way of aborting defective genes if it has any evolutionary value at all … those 39 people can’t breed now you see).

Instead of “evolutionary level above human”, you could use the term “afterlife” maybe… or the “dimension above human”… “dimension” is more math-like than science-y….. these avoids the embarrasssing reference to science and keeps it firmly in the realm of spirit/superstition/religion.

Did you learn any alien words? I’m surprised Do didn’t make up a word.

 

Sawyer’s response:

Ti and Do were speaking of an “evolution” of both mind and body. The human kingdom is a level of life. They said there was a mineral kingdom, a plant kingdom, an animal kingdom, a human kingdom and the level above human kingdom. They said it was ALL physical. All Kingdom levels have physical bodies. They said that the base kingdom levels have less individualistic “minds/spirits”. They said the animal kingdom do have “spirits” that exist after death of their physical body. They said a Next Level Above Human physical body was grown on a vine,  hence no need for human/mammalian reproduction. It is a misunderstanding to say I and they “didn’t believe in science/proof — space aliens and all”. I have no idea where you got this idea but it’s not unusual to miss a great deal when we read and listen to points of view we don’t tend to want to consider belief of.

As you said, “…interpolation we can connect the dots and it all fits together like a glove.” which is what everyone tends to do when they explore and have a mindset to attempt to justify. I say that all the time about what I believe and in some respects have seen where I was wrong just as those who explore Darwinian hypothesis often see where it and they are wrong. When my stepdaughter was in physics class in high school she would tell me about the Galapolos island birds beaks adapting to crack harder nuts to survive. I wondered why they didn’t just eat bugs instead of working so hard to get the nuts. But maybe they were not so inclined but contrary to what you say about that archaic mindset fitting together like a glove, I find with simple logic it hardly fits at all except in relatively minor ways. Certainly adaptability is prevalent in all species but there is no evidence that demonstrates how species change. If you know of evidence that one doesn’t have to go to University to memorize new terms and ideas to comprehend as logical then please share the links with me.

Here are some of my questions?

What stimulated a cell to make cilium into fins if that’s the idea? Couldn’t the cell move around and survive without doing so? Or did it occur in some other way. What is the science on this?

Likewise what stimulated a sea creature with fins to morph those fins into legs like a crab or did the legs come from the cell before the fins?

One can imagine that the water dried up so the finned creature was flopping around on dry land trying to live and in doing so used it’s fins and learned it could move along by pushing against the land but then by the time it could reproduce having learned that it would have died from asphyxiation. Share with me the ideas on how the mutations come about. Does it take a meteor with radioactive particles to land in the ocean to cause genetic mutation? And if so how does the mutation sort itself through all the various forms of mutation it would randomly encounter to arrive at the one that it theoretically advances it’s survival. I am aware that bacteria communicate with one another and learn and in that way grow and spread and perhaps strengthen themselves in that regard but if they simply become stronger by conquering instead of being defeated, why would they start to develop new systems and structures. If we exercise our muscles and they become stronger muscles does any amount of exercise cause them to organize into a heart versus a thigh cell. It seems to believe that cells can organize into different organs that then can be the building blocks of more complex systems and organisms would require a great deal of intelligent decision making and trial and error application.

And what about wings. What would be the motivation to grow fins into wings or legs into wings or cilium into wings, fish, reptile or insect.

If humans are the top of the evolutionary chain than how come humans don’t have the best of all creatures? Why don’t humans have wings or at least some of them. Wouldn’t they have them to get rid of them. What environmental factors could stimulate that. Does the fish see the bird and desire to fly? Or does the bird see the fish and desire to swim. In that case, since we see birds that do dive into the water for fish and sometimes fish will jump out of the sea to eat a bird but that hardly results in mutations of one another’s species to the other?

And why do humans not smell as good as dogs or run as fast as cheetahs?

What stimulated four legged mammals to start to want to stand up like monkeys? It slowed them down so couldn’t have been to better escape and there are plenty of rodents that can climb trees with four legs to get food in a tree and/or to escape a predator that can’t climb as well or as fast.

Are there computer models to suggest some answers to these questions?

Where did random evolution “decide” to put more stock into Mind development to solve problems rather than growing stronger legs or better smell or better taste and hearing and sight and perception.

And the eye. How in the world did the eye randomly evolve. What evidence of an eye is in any one cell. And what determines how many eyes are more useful. Wouldn’t it be more useful for all creatures to have eyes all over the place if it could save them from being eaten or for finding food or one’s mate or shelter? Why do horseshoe crabs have 11 eyes? Why wouldn’t some have 2, 3, 4, 10 working their way to 11 and why stop at 11? And what determines where to place those eyes? Why put an eye on the tail when it’s thought the tail is only for turning itself over or does it help to see a predator so to raise it up. Or is the presence of an eye on the tail a way of looking at a predator in the eye to scare it off in more ways than one. What amphipian or mammal would feel threatned by a horseshoe crab’s raised tail?

If all of what we know as life came about by random response to stimuli or lack of from other creatures and/or the environment’s weather conditions and food growth why do humans do so many things that seem to reverse their survival that some learn from and others don’t and why is it that the ones that don’t learn seem to dominate the ones that do.

For instance who has a better chance of surviving – a human with a gun or a human with a peace sign when confronted by something threatening their life. How did negotiation come to be seen as more evolved?

Why do so many on all sides of the fence believe it wrong to kill another human? Why is that wrong. If I can have more of what I want that I determine I NEED then why not just take it, steal it and kill to get it? Those who do that survive longer don’t they?

Isn’t that actually the example we see in history in the domineering empires? The meek become the victims of the predators just like the deer to the lion.

If the MIND is part of evolution as evidenced by humans using their mind in ways that animals don’t seem able though animals do show a great deal of mind development, just not to the degree of a human, while in some ways it seems what humans call mind development to an animal would seem counterproductive. For instance what value is there evolutionarily to art and sports and philosophy and space exploration and getting “high” and sex for pleasure alone? What’s the point of happiness based on what we are taught by society brings happiness? Does it increase anyone lifespans significantly more so than happiness derived from having adequate food, air, water and shelter from the elements and predators?

Why is it that humans seem to be “evolving” to require more and more to be content and satisfied? Why has survival of the fittest become a mindset?

If all life evolved from particles that originated in space from a big bang to the human condition to where humans began to build things from those same particles (counting life as actually everything as every particle is in process of changing by ion exchange however detectible, etc.) that they did not actually provide then shouldn’t humans have in their genetic memory all they went through to get to their current state so that they should be able to have all the answers to these questions as it’s like a computer that simply kept gathering data as it expanded it’s database?

Why is it that we die? Doesn’t science tell us that all our cells are replacing one another every moment of every day of our lives. What tells them to slow down and result in aging and wrinkles and saging flesh at a predictable age?

Isn’t it interesting that in the ancient records it was said that after a major flood that wiped out most life in a certain vicinity that there was a directive that humans would be limited to 120 years old when before that there were many who recorded ages up til 900 years old when they knew well how to count sun cycles and even write in various ways that archology easily documents AND since then it’s rare that anyone lives more than that 120. Is that evidence that whoever gave that directive knew something we still don’t understand?

Isn’t there a little logic in the facts that humans can take elements they did not provide and can make intricate machines from, that humans themselves as intricate machines would have likely come about in a similar way, with the same kind of effort and designed intelligence by beings more evolved than humans?

Why do humans have to be the top of the food chain and why do we see constant updates to even our physics throughout history yet some insist there can no longer be further updates. For instance a professor of physics scoffed at that idea that there could be additional elements to the periodic table, yet with particle bombardment at CERN  and in nuke reactors they are creating new elements with different atomic weights?

Isn’t the evidence that we are NOT the top of the heap in any respect overwhelming but requires a more evolved mind to perceive as reality that starts by being willing to consider just as one had to be willing to think there are things that are real that at one time couldn’t be seen – like the composition of particles saturating our environment yet unseen, and frequency “data” structures shooting through the particle filled air?

 

Revelation 11 Two Witnesses Evidence as Ti and Do of Heaven’s Gate UFO Two

January 15, 2014

The following are questions from a student trying to write a paper on the evidence of Ti and Do as the fulfillment of the Rev 11 Two Witnesses prophecy, to which I have responded with concise answers as to go in depth is a huge book:

1) When exactly did the 1,260 days pass when the two witnesses were granted authority to prophesy to all the people of the earth?

This question is referring to:

Rev 11:3 And I will give power unto my two witnesses, and they shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth.

The passing of the 1260 day prophecy period was announced on April 21, 1976 in a college auditorium in Manhattan, Kansas, when Ti, then using the name Peep (while Do was using the name Bo) said, “the harvest is closed” and neither did another public meeting thereafter. However, they then instructed their student body of about a 100 students in 7 groups, counting their own group with 6 student helpers to finish the existing meetings they had scheduled around the U.S. Those meetings were finished by mid June which would be 1260 days from when Ti and Do officialy began their prophecy period on January 1, 1973 when they left their Houston, Texas lives behind that included both their families, friends, homes, possessions and careers.

Sources: Sawyers blog having been Ti and Do’s student for 19 years and the book Do wrote entitled, “’88 Update – The UFO Two and Their Crew” to be found at: https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2010/03/02/88-update-the-ufocloud-of-light-two-tifather-and-dojesus-and-their-crew-not-space-aliens-or-discarnate-spirits-or-luciferians/

2) Can you give examples of how they able to devour their enemies with fire from their mouth during that time? Also, can you give examples of their power over the sky and water, and how they had struck the earth with plague?

Here is the verse:

Rev 11:5 And if any man will hurt them, fire proceedeth out of their mouth, and devoureth their enemies: and if any man will hurt them, he must in this manner be killed.

First off it is “IF”, thus does not say that what follows absolutely takes place and also doesn’t state that if it does anyone will be particularily aware of what takes place. And if some “hurt” is inflicted against them, according to the varied definitions of “hurt”, i.e. can be someone being unjust or doing something wrong to them, even offending them, to which their response will be to “eat them down” (devour) with the power/force (fire) of their words/language out of their incarnate mouths. One can’t have a mouth unless they are incarnate.  Even though prophecies are composed of figures,  metaphores and symbols and literals, they will upon fulfillment all have a literal representation on Earth among the humans that experience it and are open to their depiction of reality, though will also leave as an option their consideration though most will not bother with as it’s not seen as profitable. But in the case of these TWO who are clearly incarnate – defined as “in carnal”, from the latin “carne”, flesh, and also demonstrated by Jesus saying He (and his Father, by the way) would come as a “son of man” defined as “offspring of human from the geneology of Adam (man)”. All these depictions are rooted in the records of the Old Testament and other materials not included in the Old and New Testaments but directly linked to the same time period, locations and people.

To “eat down”(devour) is like saying they will be put in their place, overwhelmed, have their affect reduced, wore out. And fire or lightning, having to do with delivering a literally powerful perspective and message that no one can stand up to and as used by Jesus, is like a smelting of gold to get rid of impurities that in this example those who hate them will be especially subject to as spelled out in Mat 3:11 below and because of will result in their demise in some way relative to (in the manner) the “hurt” they seek to inflict.

And because, going against these two and not repenting (changing their mind) before they die, they will have by their own choices eliminated themselves from the “book of life”, thus they will not only experience death as all humans do (with the exception of a Soul, as Enoch, Moses, Elijah and Jesus, that came from the Kingdom of God/Heaven and had the task to demonstrate their eternal physical nature) but will also have their spirits recycled as well as depicted by being included in the “lake of fire”.

One reason this is depicted as “if” this then this, is because the Kingdom of God/Heaven don’t predetermine human reactions though they know what most of them will be, the same as humans can observe animal behavior and predict most of it. But there are always some animals that surprise us. The Kingdom of God/Heaven Older Members look for those and anticipate all as capable of positive responses.

Most Christian commentators see this verse as a clue to the identity of one of the Two Witnesses in the records thinking that because Elijah asked God to bring fire down on the prophets of Baal, which occurred and then was witnessed as “taken” physically into a “whirlwind” (UFO), and also evidenced weather control, he was one of these two.

Ti said it was the same Soul from the Kingdom of God/Heaven who fulfilled the incarnate tasks of Adam, Enoch, Moses, Elijah, Jesus and then Bo/Do and would also be the One to return for the second harvest (see two harvests in Rev 14), which is not an incarnate return and is the one most Christians are still anticipating, not realizing that He is returning for those who came to believe in Ti and Do while they were incarnate.

However, there are examples of the application of this verse:

The setting: Mrs. Culpepper was the owner of the house where Bo and Peep held their first private meetings in April of 1975, having been invited by a meditation group in Los Angeles – “city of God’s angels (messengers)”, of which Joan Culpepper was a participant and briefly became one of their followers and then for a short time turned against them and then after they became a public news story one of their proponents, though never to the degree of following with them again.

In the book, “UFO Missionaries Extraordinary”, by Hayden Hewes and Brad Steiger, published by Pocket Books, June 1976, on page 33 it states, “Mrs. Culpepper emphasized that in her opinion Bo and Peep were dangerous. They were not run of the mill con artists. ‘They have tremendous mental power. It is not hypnosis. It is thought transplant. They can do it in a matter of minutes.'”

Even though this is not a positive example it does go to show how this one person, who is by far not alone depicted Ti and Do as evidencing their “mouth” in the delivery of  words that of course all start as thoughts were perceived by others to have “tremendous mental power” (fire).

In another example Sawyer recollects:

Ti and Do said they were driving down a two lane road in a mountainous area. A car full of people came up behind them and apparently didn’t like the speed they were going so began to honk at them. There was no place to pull over to let them pass but eventually they passed them and as they did gave them the finger. A short time later they came up on them. They had driven off the road into the ditch.

Coincidence? or what Jesus described as what you sow you reap, actually kin the idea of karma. Note that the word translated to “manner” in the verse is just as logically translated to “after that” or “likewise” and “accordingly” these folks were; abolished or extinguished off the road when they angrily and unjustly wanted Ti and Do to get off the road to the degree that they sought to express their insulting gesture.

But their words were filled with “fire” as fire is also relative to “light” having to do with both providing enlightening that to someone in their opposition would try to ignore or combat. In other words, no one had anything to say to combat what they taught. People didn’t believe in them and found fault with them and called them charlatans and “mind controlling” and like hypnotists but had no evidence of any of that. However, their “fire” was also felt by many as “authority”, that was also said about Jesus, to a degree that can not be actually measured to understand how/why. Finally, their words had a purging kind of affect on people. People claimed they looked right through them. They didn’t say or do anything against any people at all. What was actually happening was that they by their presence around someone became disarmed (eaten down). The actual mechanics of that was the intensity of the Mind that occupied their physical vehicles and how that would send discarnates that make their home with humans as a normal characteristic of the human kingdom packing. In other words, they frightened away spirits and left people speechless to combat them.

For at least the first 10 years with them when I was in a meeting of all the students with them, if I felt my eyes meet Do’s, as Do did most of the talking, I could not look at him without literally feeling a kind of twitching that even had a grinding sound I heard inside my head that felt so uncomfortable I could not continue looking into his eyes. As I got rid of my discarnate influences that all humans have who time share human bodies and we decide to permit or not, which is what was talked about as “sweeping out one’s house” or “cleaning one’s robe or garment”, etc. I no longer experienced that.

Here is the verse, broken down to it’s Greek translation options:

Rev 11:5 And if any man will hurt*1 ((be unjust to, do wrong, injure, offend, take wrong)) them, fire*2 ((lightning)) proceedeth out of their mouth*3 ((gash in face, implying by language/words)), and devoureth*4 ((to eat down)) their enemies ((those who hate them)): and if any man will hurt ((be unjust to, do wrong, injure, offend, take wrong)) them, he must in this manner ((3779 houto= after that, in this fashion, likewise)) be killed*5 ((destroyed, extinguished, abolished, separated, allowed to perish, killed)).

*1 hurt = 91 adikeo ad-ee-keh’-o     from adikoV – adikos 94; to be unjust, i.e. (actively) do wrong (morally, socially or physically):–hurt, injure, be an offender, be unjust, (do, suffer, take) wrong.

*2 fire = 4442 pur poor     a primary word; “fire” (literally or figuratively, specially, lightning*):–fiery, fire.

As in smelting:

Mat 3:11 I indeed baptize you with water unto repentance. but he that cometh after me is mightier than I, whose shoes I am not worthy to bear: he shall baptize you with the Holy Ghost, and with fire:

*3 mouth = 4750 stoma stom’-a     probably strengthened from a presumed derivative of the base of tomwteroV – tomoteros 5114; the mouth (as if a gash in the face); by implication, language (and its relations); figuratively, an opening (in the earth); specially, the front or edge (of a weapon):–edge, face, mouth.     *4 devoureth = 2719 katesthio kat-es-thee’-o     from kata – kata 2596 and esqiw – esthio 2068 (including its alternate); to eat down, i.e. devour (literally or figuratively):–devour.     2596 kata kat-ah’       a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or accusative) with which it is joined):–about, according as (to), after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even, like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before, beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered, (dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for, from … to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), … by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout, -oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost, where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these applications, and frequently denotes opposition, distribution, or intensity.     2068 esthio es-thee’-o      strengthened for a primary edo (to eat); used only in certain tenses, the rest being supplied by fagw – phago 5315; to eat (usually literal):–devour, eat, live.

Another example of usage:

Luk 15:30 But as soon as this thy son was come, which hath devoured thy living with harlots, thou hast killed for him the fatted calf.

*5 killed = 615 apokteino ap-ok-ti’-no     from apo – apo 575 and kteino (to slay); to kill outright; figuratively, to destroy:–put to death, kill, slay.     575 apo apo’       a primary particle; “off,” i.e. away (from something near), in various senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):–(X here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th), from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation, completion, reversal, etc.

Greek Word Study (Transliteration-Pronunciation Etymology & Grammar)

1) to kill in any way whatever         1a) to destroy, to allow to perish       2) metaph. to extinguish, abolish         2a) to inflict mortal death         2b) to deprive of spiritual life and procure eternal misery in hell

The following alternate example lists the Greek transliteration “apokteino” twice, once translated to English as “put” and the other as “death”, but it seems to make sense in the reverse order of the context as it is saying that Herod would have rather X him than X him because he feared the multitude… Killing him (John the Baptist) would have upset the multitude much more than “imprisioning him” – “putting him away”, I presume, a feasible way to interpret apokteino:         Mat 14:5 And when he would ((determined, be disposed, desired, have rather)) have put ((apokteino= killed)) him to death ((apokteino= than put him away)), he feared the multitude, because they counted him as a prophet.

To the second part of your question, you are referring to verse:

Rev 11:6 These have power to shut heaven, that it rain not in the days of their prophecy: and have power over waters to turn them to blood, and to smite the earth with all plagues, as often as they will ((determine)).

The examples in this verse evidences what Moses performed upon Jehovah’s instigation to get Pharaoh to let the Israelites out of Egyptian control. The verse doesn’t say they use those powers and to the contrary Jesus said upon his/their return, the “false prophets” would be the ones showing great signs and wonders to fool even the elect:

Mar 13:22 For false Christs and false prophets shall rise, and shall shew signs and wonders, to seduce, if it were possible, even the elect.

The elect are those prepared to receive/recognize The Father and Son’s prophesied return, either while they were incarnate or afterwards to date. Speaking of which it was also very clear that upon his/their return they would both have new names as they would have new human bodies to take over that were prepped for them and Ti and Do actually said would have died had they not taken them over. In this verse, that is one that offers some of this proof, the term God is actually referring to the same individual who performed the tasks of Jehovah, The Father and then with the new name of Peep and finally Ti:

Rev 3:12 Him that overcometh will I make a pillar in the temple of my God, and he shall go no more out: and I will write upon him the name of my God, and the name of the city of my God, which is new Jerusalem, which cometh down out of heaven from my God: and I will write upon him my new name.

************
3) Who or what was the beast that overcame and killed them?
************

In short, the beast are all humans who know it or not are making choices that are the result of the Luciferian fallen angel space alien’s influence over them. This influence comes in two ways. a) From the facts of the many UFO and Space Alien related events throughout history but showing the most evidence in the U.S. in the 1940’s and 1950’s when they were released from their “bottomless pit” as depicted in…:

Rev 9:1 And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth: and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit.

…which resulted in people and governments recognizing their physical reality and starting their agencies to deal with them. There is evidence, from leaks that factions in the U.S. government, mostly involving the military and intelligence organizations met with and worked with at least one space alien race in the 1970’s and agreed to not try to stop their abduction of humans for their hybridization experiments in exchange for access to their spacecraft technologies that the U.S. badly wanted. This degree of relationship largely began under President/General Eisenhower and has since been the motivation behind the building of the U.S. shadow government that Hillary Clinton admitted to the existence of publically when she was running for public office years ago. This is just one example of how the space aliens have influenced many developments in all fields of science as it was reported that the U.S. at one point had no less than five of their spacecraft to back engineering their zero gravity propulsion systems.

b) This second way in which these Luciferians have influenced humans is through their “discarnate” presence. This mainly takes place among those humans who rise to a certain amount of popularity and thus power, and mostly in governmental positions as the intention is to escalate the agenda to get human help to build the technology the Luciferians want and need if they are going to get off the planet before it is recycled again. Plus they are desperate to add to their ranks from the human kingdom, hence the myrid of Contactees that have formed groups in the U.S. and Europe since the turn of the 20th century.

Therefore the “beast” is essentially the U.S. government though any/all governments are also beasts where the meaning of the word has to do with wild and/or venomous mammals, like many humans, venomous in the way they justify killing and stealing from other nations while working and spreading lies and deceit to get their way, that is pushed by the main body of people with the biggest controls, all of which are poisons to a soul and against the Kingdom of God/Heaven. When governments go about conquering others, subjugating populations by installing puppet rulers and raping natural resources they foster unrest and discord while blanketly lying to cover up what they don’t want the public to know about. Of course not all in government are in league with this “beast” and subsequently the literal ones who were released from the deep/debtless places, aka “bottomless pit” are used to naturally put all to the test of the ways in which each of us can be in league with this “beast” through giving out loyalty and/or working for them, the mark of the beast on our “head” and/or “hand”.

These questions about the beast and referencing the Two Witnesses being subdued (overcome) and seperated/completed/departed with/at/from/upon death (killed) is spelled out in this verse:

Rev 11:7 And when ((as long as, whenever)) (they) shall (have) finished ((5055 teleo= perform, accomplished, as long as, ended)) their testimony, the beast*1 ((The Luciferian fallen angel space aliens influence of the human kingdom)) that ascendeth ((to go up)) out of((from)) the bottomless pit*2 ((deep, pit)) shall make ((cast out)) war((fight, battle)) against ((amid, accompaniment, among)) them, and shall overcome*3 ((subdue)) them, and*4 ((2532 kai=also, even, then)) kill*5 ((apokteino= separated, ceased, departed[exited?], completed, reversed[returned?] with/at/from/upon death)) them ((themselves)).

*1 beast = 2342 therion thay-ree’-on
diminutive from the same as qhra – thera 2339; a dangerous animal:–(venomous, wild) beast.
2339 thera thay’-rah
from ther (a wild animal, as game); hunting, i.e. (figuratively) destruction:–trap.

*2 bottomless pit = 12 abussos ab’-us-sos
from a – a 1 (as a negative particle) and a variation of buqoV – buthos 1037; depthless, i.e. (specially) (infernal) “abyss”:–deep, (bottomless) pit.
1037 buthos boo-thos’
a variation of baqoV – bathos 899; depth, i.e. (by implication) the sea:–deep.

*3 overcome = 3528 nikao nik-ah’-o
from nikh – nike 3529; to subdue (literally or figuratively):–conquer, overcome, prevail, get the victory.
3529 nike nee’-kay
apparently a primary word; conquest (abstractly), i.e. (figuratively) the means of success:–victory.

THE BEAST CAN NOT OVERCOME THE TWO WITNESSES – Their task was not designed to be the sacrificial lamb as Jesus’ task was to help the students to graduate their second of three trimesters in their soul/spirit births.

Humans are the ones the Luciferian fallen angel space aliens (beast) work through and can never literally overcome the Next Level Older Members (Two Witnesses). They can at the most only kill the physical bodies these Two temporarily “wear” (like clothing) for their task – called being incarnate within. Their Soul bodies are eternal and being Older Members they have Kingdom of God/Heaven designed physical bodies to return to that have no human characteristics (humans were designed to have the potential to adopt some of Their characteristics and were designed to have a Kingdom of God/Heaven (Next Level) physical image/likeness – thus humanoid looking.

The English word, “Overcome” has the same meaning as to “conquer” or “prevail” having it’s roots in the Hebrew word, “israel” that Jacob was named after prevailing in his fight against a Luciferian fallen angel space alien (probably discarnate) as “those who overcome, or THOSE WHO CONQUER OR PREVAIL AS/LIKE/UNDER THE DIRECTION OF JEHOVAH. And Jesus said those who Overcome, what Ti and Do spoke of as THE “overcoming of human behavior and ways PROCESS”, the opportunity to do so would be “given to a new nation/ethnicity” leaving the previous ethnicity called today’s Jews vacant of Next Level Mind/Spirit although many who identify with their heritage still think of themselves as a nation and ethnicity with a special relationship with the Kingdom of God/Heaven and the past promises based on their committments (covenant) with the Most High God. This is not to pass judgement on Jews as they are individually no different than anyone else. At any given moment someone who is Jewish can choose to believe whatever they want to believe and based on that each will have their relationship with the Most High God, who depending on their thirst will lead them to the hightest truths, which in my opinion will be Ti and Do, so they can decide where their allegience truely lies. If one can not or rather does not want to “change their mind” when a change opportunity has been provided, (as with Ti and Do’s arrival) to which they can see all their heritage played out in modern terms and understanding that are no longer steeped in mystery, then that’s their ultimate choice and they will be judged by that choice, so such time will be their final judgement during the course of the remaining years to the end of the age. (An age to the Kingdom of God/Heaven is speaking of the course of the entire experiment, starting from the Adam/Eve account to the return of the Kingdom of God/Heaven (Father and Jesus and Saints), as Ti and Do and Crew, following the remaining short time after they have been incarnate, but while only visible to humans in the literal “heavens” to accept or reject.

This is suggesting that Do and Crew may be scheduled to return one more time before recycling the entire planet’s surface, but NOT incarnate and NOT walking among humans but staying in their spacecrafts but in such a way that might offer one last proof that they were representing themselves by the time and effort incarnate as Ti and Do.

HOWEVER THE BEAST CAN, IF PERMITTED BY THE NEXT LEVEL “SUBDUE” THEIR EFFORTS

Therefore, from the various translation options listed in Strongs, “subdue” most seems to represent what the BEAST does to these Two Witnesses. Subdue is defined in this context as:

1.to bring a person or group of people under control using force
2.to soften something, or make something less intense

This is what took place as a result of the October 18, 1975 CBS TV network news broadcast by Walter Cronkite that revealed the “mystery surrounding the Two” as solved that Ti and Do seriously felt was their being shot down by the press as it forcibly established control over Ti and Do and crew. After that, the pictures of their physical bodies were all over the news. For them to give public meetings after that using the same motis operandi would now be familiar to people, so that their message wouldn’t stand much of a chance of breaking through the barrage of thoughts and actions that judged them as dangerous mind controlling false prophets.

*4 and = 2532 kai kahee
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:–and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet.

*5 killed = 615 apokteino ap-ok-ti’-no
from apo – apo 575 and kteino (to slay); to kill outright; figuratively, to destroy:–put to death, kill, slay.
575 apo apo’
a primary particle; “off,” i.e. away (from something near), in various senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):–(X here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th), from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation, completion, reversal, etc.

From a primary Greek Word Study (Transliteration-Pronunciation Etymology & Grammar) for apokteino:

1) to kill in any way whatever
1a) to destroy, to allow to perish
2) metaph. to extinguish, abolish
2a) to inflict mortal death
2b) to deprive of spiritual life and procure eternal misery in hell

For this reason some translators list apokteino as meaning to “kill in any way”, yet it is almost always translated to “kill” or “slay” in 55 New Testament locations, mostly pertaining to Jesus death, which is interesting as to Jesus HE wasn’t being killed or slain exactly because He KNEW He was more than that human vehicle he wore (the vehicle wrapped around His true nature, His Soul body) that He, perhaps with His Father’s assistance, in the tomb would heal and transform into a new physical body that didn’t exactly resemble the one that was crucified, yet had left some characteristics remaining so he could prove to his disciples he was still a PHYSICAL BEING AND NOT A SPIRIT. But pertaining to apokteino, there is actually no evidence published of the meaning of kteino or any related term, while for other Greek words translated to kill there are many associated spellings.

The following alternate example lists the Greek transliteration “apokteino” twice, once translated to English as “put” and the other as “death”, but it seems to make sense in the reverse order of the context as it is saying that Herod would have rather X him than X him because he feared the multitude… Killing him (John the Baptist) would have upset the multitude much more than “imprisioning him” – “putting him away”, I presume, a feasible way to interpret apokteino:

Mat 14:5 And when he would ((determined, be disposed, desired, have rather)) have put ((apokteino= killed)) him to death ((apokteino= than put him away)), he feared the multitude, because they counted him as a prophet.

However, with this said it always remained a puzzle as to the Rev 11:7 usage to say the “beast” shall “overcome them and kill them” as both overcome and kill, even if we say apokteino is meant as “kill in any way”, separation by death, etc. as both connot They are finished. But if they both have the same connotation, why say it in two distinct ways as none of these prophecies are ever casual in their use of words and they don’t display a format to where one is an adverb as both have their own pronoun subject as “them” associated. All five of these words are in the original manuscripts used to construct this verse. On top of that the word “and”. Greek “kai” was between the two verb/subject combonations (though reversed in order as is the way Greek is formatted) which is also never used causually in scripture but can be translated, in this context equally well as “also, even, then” but as “and” is mostly used to seperate two distinct events.

Of course I would never have wondered all these things if I wasn’t trying to match the scripture to what I know took place with Ti and Do. That actually explains why most of prophecy is actually impossible to decipher accurately without having a real example to apply, which can explain the fact that part of the prophecies express the timing for the revealing of what was formally hidden. Theologians often say these truths and understandings of prophecies can not be known until Jesus returns, largely drawing from Daniel being told to “shut up the prophecies until the end” and John being told the same thing in Revelations 10, to where the end, that is of the “sounding” stage is spelled out as “in the days of the voice of the seventh angel”:

Rev 10:7 But in the days of the voice of the seventh angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God should be finished, as he hath declared to his servants the prophets.

Note: here the mystery that is to be finished is what the ones called Jesus and his Father, that I believe are evidenced to date as Do and Ti, had “declared to his servants the prophets”, thus contained within what we call the Old New testament teachings and prophecies of the future. As hard to believe as this will be for many, I believe this seventh (trumpet) sounding occurred from February 15th of 2013 to the end of March 2013, with the arrival of the great meteor that produced no human causualties but caused a great deal of physical damage to the Russian town of Chelyabinsk and was followed 16 hours later by another object said to evidence the same trajectory. The details of this event are available at: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chelyabinsk_meteor, but are not at all the only evidence of a major annoucement from the Level Above Human. On this same day, there was a fireball seen over northern California and a giant asteroid flying close by Earth that was as close as 17,000 miles which is inside the Moons orbit. Days later there were fireballs reported all over the world and there were some days before as well. Then there was a fireball that looked more like a craft as it no tail or sonic boom or fragments that caused a huge stir from the great lake Ohio area of the U.S. to the Virginias but was also reported seen from Vermont to Florida and finally the Pan Starrs comet that made perihelian on March 10, 2013 and was visible to the naked eye for some days before and after than, curiously during the anniversry of the Hale-Bopp Comet Do and Students considered their “sign” for the timing of their exit by Palm Sunday on March 21-24 of 1997. Pan Starrs was not just a curiousity in it’s timing but also showed a “companion object” with it that was on the internet briefly before being whisked away, (though I have a copy of the images). The companions was explained as an anomoly, perhaps evidence it was breaking up, yet the object was quite large and was away from the head of the comet, thus as if flying in front of it and as it was reported as one of several pictures couldn’t have been part of the comet breaking up or it would have simply become part of it’s tail, logically speaking as to be projected in front of this massive object would seem to defy physics as humans understand physics, which in reality is very little. Another curiosity was the way Feb. 15, 2013 was to the day or two 40 years (1 hour by God’s time) from the day that Ti and Do left Bourne, Texas armed with having significantly awakened to their mission for what they both believed to be from their Heavenly Father from outer space (the literal heavens).

But what if apokteino is actually “kill in any way” while also meaning a SEPARATION BY DEATH, COMPLETION BY DEATH, DEPARTED/EXIT BY DEATH

After all the translation options above, of the Greek, “apokteino” where “apo” as a prefix is defined as, “separated (off, away), ceased, departed, completed” and “kteino” defined presumably as death or dying (mortal or spirit), extinguish, abolish and/or destroy, when combined translates to SEPARATION/off/away, COMPLETION, DEPARTED, reversed/RETURNED WITH/AT/FROM/UPON (some form of becoming dead, thus DEATH), which seems to be far more filled with likliness possabilities than translating it to “killed”, ignoring the prefix “apo” entirely. If it was meant to be just “killed” why not use the Greek word:

5407 phoneuo (fon-yoo’-o) from 5406; verb, translated as – kill 10, do murder 1, slay 1; 12 = to kill, slay, murder, to commit murder.

For example as in:

Matthew 5:21 Ye have heard that it was said of them of old time, Thou shalt not kill ((5407 phoneuo)); and whosoever shall kill shall be in danger of the judgment:

But I’m questioning the translation not the Greek word it came from. After all, this verse is speaking about Two members of the Kingdom of God/Heaven who as described in Rev 11:4 as “OLIVE TREES” and “LAMPSTANDS” are “ANOINTED ONES” (see Zechariah 4), thus “CHRISTS” in the history of these depictions. So as is evident by my choice of upper case characters above the essential differences I see in “apokteino” refers to these two being “seperated, departed or having completed something with/at/from/upon death of the body whereas the Greek “phoneuo” refers exclusivly to the act of killing someone, even though the supposed root of kteino claims the same “to slay” translation, that is IF it was used without that very purposeful “apo”.

Since these verses are depicting the prophecy period and it’s fulfillment, when they complete/finish it will be up to these TWO in their mental communion with Their Older Member (Heavenly Father) who is on a spacecraft nearby. The “beast” has no say in when, where and how they will exit, “seperate from their vehicles (bodies)”. Just like with Jesus, the “beast” saw to it that he was seperated from his vehicle BUT IT WAS AT HIS INSTIGATION according to the instructions he received from his Father when he climbed what has been called the Transfiguration Mount with his disciples James, John and Peter in witness.

By the way this is another reason some believe the Two Witnesses are Moses and Elijah, because from this meeting one or more of these disciples initially recorded giving these two messengers those identities that Jesus did not verify nor deny. For all intents and purposes it is quite possible that these two were the physical bodies of Moses and Elijah. After all Elijah was witnessed by Elisha, his disciple to have been “taken” by a whirlwind and Moses walked off into the desert and his body or remains were never found (and it’s hard to imagine that some would not have went to look for him at some point). Ti and Do felt Moses was taken but I am not aware of why. As I have said before, Ti said that the Older Member Soul from the Next Level (Kingdom of God/Heaven) named Do on this Two Witnesses task was also the same One who performed the tasks of Adam, Enoch, Moses, Elijah and Jesus, thus those Christians who believe the Two are Moses and Elijah and/or Enoch and/or any of these are correct. But where Christians are not correct is in expecting they to arrive and call themselves by those names. Jesus even said not to believe someone who comes saying they were Jesus the Christ. Ti and Do said they are not Jesus because Jesus was the name of that physical body that Older Member Soul took to perform his task. Even though that vehicle with the Older Member soul occupying it were lifted up into the cloaked (cloud) spacecraft to show those in observance how they physically come and go doesn’t mean once he was on that spacecraft he would have stayed in the body. In any case, if he did stay in that body, he then sacrificed it or as Do suggested “hung it in a closet” on board a spacecraft at one point before he was sure that they had come in purposely crashed spacecrafts in the 1940’s and 1950’s.

In these verses below Jesus makes it very clear what he was doing by turning himself in to have his body killed:

Joh 10:11 I am the good shepherd: the good shepherd giveth his life for the sheep.
Joh 10:12 But he that is an hireling, and not the shepherd, whose own the sheep are not, seeth the wolf coming, and leaveth the sheep, and fleeth: and the wolf catcheth them, and scattereth the sheep.
Joh 10:13 The hireling fleeth, because he is an hireling, and careth not for the sheep.
Joh 10:14 I am the good shepherd, and know my sheep, and am known of mine.
Joh 10:15 As the Father knoweth me, even so know I the Father: and I lay down my life for the sheep.
Joh 10:16 And other sheep I have, which are not of this fold: them also I must bring, and they shall hear my voice; and there shall be one fold, and one shepherd.
Joh 10:17 Therefore doth my Father love me, because I lay down my life, that I might take it again.
Joh 10:18 No man taketh it from me, but I lay it down of myself. I have power ((1849 exousia= power of choice, liberty of doing as one pleases, authority, right, jurisdiction, strength, permission, mental power)) to lay it down, and I have power to take it again. This commandment have I received of my Father.

THIS LAST VERSE SHOWS THAT HE HAD THE CHOICE AND PERMISSION (FROM HIS FATHER) TO LAY DOWN HIS LIFE BY TURNING HIMSELF IN TO BE KILLED, A “SUICIDE” FOR HIS FATHER WHO LOVES HIM BECAUSE HE IS WILLING TO GIVE HIS ALL AND THAT HE WAS FOLLOWING HIS FATHER’S INSTRUCTION/COMMANDMENT TO DO SO. Understanding this is key to also understanding how Ti and Do and students also chose to lay down their lives for their Older Member (Father), Do for Ti and the student body for Do.

But the time frames for Their CHOSEN “seperation” from their vehicles by/through the vehicles death is determined when they have determined their task to be accomplished. That little word “and” in between being subdued (overcome) and separating/completing/departing with/by/from death (killed) doesn’t speak to how much time passes in between nor whether or not their seperation from their physical bodies occur at the same time and way or not. For instance, Revelations 12 depicts the activity from the Father’s perspective, who takes a “Woman gendered clothing”:

Rev 12:1 And there appeared a great wonder in heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars:

Subsequent verses decribe how this “woman” gives birth to a “son”, another indication that she is a parent, but the fact that she is clothed by both Sun(Father) and Moon(Mother) while under(cover) on feet (Earth as the Children’s footstool to birth). Some Christians say this “child” is the church, which has it’s truth to it as the church is the body of believers and this One in particular was once a believer but had graduated from the human kingdom long, long before the current “church body”. It was a good attempt to understand it lacking Their return. I don’t know how the “woman” part is justified though if the translation/interpretation is as general and symbolic as the symbolism, it’s kind defeats the purpose of providing a clear picture of the Kingdom of God/Heaven’s implementation of their harvest plan. After all, one only needs to look at the prophecies for the messiah’s return that the Jews are still anticipating to see how one can’t see the literal interpretation of prophecy until the prophecy is being fulfilled and even moreso after the fact. This is all part of the plan though as it offers everyone the challenge they have been groomed to choose to consider and potenitally believe in and become in allegience to exclusively to show the Next Level they are a sprouting soul seed.

These verses then depict the serpent’s arrival, again the venomous beast from the Luciferian fallen angel focus followed by the Woman taking her children to include the new liter she has groomed her Son to birth, into the wilderness, which was the wyoming campgound living experience that lasted for about 3 years before moving into suburban Colorado neighborhoods and other states thereafter.

Finally She, her vehicle is overcome by the serpents flood of thoughts against her and her son and students that she takes the greater brunt of, seperates from her vehicle (dies) in 1985 and causes the battle to focus instead on her Son and Their seed, depicted by:

Rev 12:15 And the serpent cast out of his mouth water as a flood after the woman, that he might cause her to be carried away of the flood.
Rev 12:16 And the earth helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth, and swallowed up the flood which the dragon cast out of his mouth.
Rev 12:17 And the dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ.

Thus the Luciferian space aliens through their discarnates and direct thought transmissions and through the human negativity they also largely foster directly and indirectly, stored in their genes/subconscious minds heaped on Her (Them) through the thoughts and feelings sent to them in response to their “stealing/catching (rapture) away” of the Earth human’s offspring takes a huge toll on her body literally as she must fight off every thought while shouldering the greater share of helping the student body to include her Son, the One who was Jesus rise to his position on the “throne” of the task and to then birth each of the litter of Souls via each of their difficult overcoming of all their human behaviors, ways, attachments, and overall root systems to the human kingdom and the Earth. I witnesses much of this though at the time didn’t have much of a clue of it’s extent. When one never bucks a system one never knows how intense the backlach is, even if just from what we can’t see in thoughts and feelings. People who hold public office where they are not popular with all the people do get attacked by what is to them and their foward motion negativity but they have so many supporters that buffer that negativity. Ti and Do had only a handful of supporters as did Jesus and as did Moses.

The phrase “earth opened her mouth” is a phrase for consuming someone so they die. In 1983 Ti was diagnosed with cancer in her eye and had it removed and was told by her doctor the cancer had “probably spread throughout her body”. Ti knowing doctors as she worked as a professional nurse in hospitals for many years told the doctor he had no right to tell her that without proof as it sets up the patient to battle the negative when he may be wrong. A verdict like that can ruin someone’s life and the others in their life so needs to be only said when there is sufficient proof. There was no indication she anything to try to surpress it’s growth, but then I wouldn’t have been privy to that information necessarily. It was two weeks before her vehicle died that Do told us she had been diagnosed with cancer in her liver.

However, even though it looks like she died against her will, by disease Ti also layed down her body, (as did Do twice) by heading the task to begin with knowing that They would be hated by most and potentially killed because of. They were threatened and demonized just as Jesus was and just like with Jesus for no good or legal reason as no one was cohersed into joining them and all who did join were adults, whether young or old adults but were to some degree living on their own, so no one was snatched away from their parents nest, though parents naturally had a mighty challenge to either look to their idea of God for help to understand or not.

She chose to be cremated and her ashes were spread over White Rock Lake in Dallas, Texas a few days following her vehicles death on June 19, 1985. The student body knew nothing of what she went through until two weeks before she exited her incarnation. Ti always told Do she was here to “get him started” and after that said she would “go back”. When she said this, Do always wondered what that meant as Ti didn’t give any further details. He couldn’t imagine that she meant she would be going back to her human vehicle’s family. When her vehicle expired Do said because of the stresses of Ti’s task she “burned out her vehicle” and then he knew what she meant about going back after getting him started. She came with him to birth him to his next station of bringing the students through their birth canal/metamorphosis. This was her seperation, completion, ceasation of her incarnate task and return via dropping the vehicle, the choice she knew was before her from the start of their prophecy. All in all she was incarnate and fully awake for 12 years. Do was incarnate and fully awake for 24 years. These are not accidental numbers.

More details pertaining to the identities of the “beast”:

To the Kingdom of God/Heaven these are dangerous to Souls and venomous with what they teach as following their teaching, behaviors and ways are deadly to any Soul. Many people are fooled by their general peaceful nature and caring about the Earth environment as evidenced by various contactees. Lucifer was called an “angel of light” for he had drawn into his soul a certain amount of Kingdom of God/Heaven “holy” mind/spirit which amounts to information about the physical reality and how the Evolutionary Level Above Human (Kingdom of God/Heaven) works to build “gardens” to grow Souls upon towards new membership in their Family, their behaviors and ways) but having rebelled from allegience to his Older Member (heavenly Father) lost much of the awareness his connection and experience provided. The one called Lucifer is actually in the spirit world along with the original fallen angels that Enoch detailed. However all the humans who they seeded through their hybridization programs long, long ago, before the start of the latest civilization garden like experiment, marked by the Adam and Eve event, that were allowed to survive the floods or other recycling stages on the Earth, by hiding underground or in the seas, were allowed by the Kingdom of God/Heaven to come out of their facilities sometime during the 1940’s and 1950’s which is depicted by the opening of the bottomless pit in Rev 9:1 that was sycronized with the Kingdom of God/Heaven planned, “UFO Crashes” that marked the main arrival of most of the returned “saints”. The Ones who were Jesus and His Father came in the same way but previous to the full body of students with the first possabily as early as 1897 in the Aurora, Texas crash with one non-human body found and buried and reported in the press.

The fallen angel’s descendents while at the height of their civilization had acquired technologies that they took with them into their underground hiding places, not far different than what is happening now in human governments anticipating environmental calamity, space alien attacks, nuclear war or pandemic threats to human existence. As we speak building of extensive underground facilities progresses all over the world. The Kingdom of God/Heaven will choose which to allow to survive until the civilization is re-planted, possably by another Adam/Eve type of experiment that would follow a complete recylcing of the current civilization on Earth. Then at whatever appointed time, possabily 1000 years later the Kingdom of God/Heaven would open up one or more of the underground facilities that had been shut up, to allow those humans who were trying to propogate and survive to come to the surface. These humans that emerge with their technology will be seen by the upcoming civilization’s human population in the same way humans have come to recognize the existing space alien population. These new space aliens would have the same kind of agenda the last crop of space aliens have now. They want to encourage humans who at that time would have the facilities to construct flying objects to build models that could be used to escape the planet as opposed to being trapped inside the earth again. And they would want to restore the propogation of their species, thus would abduct humans to extract eggs and sperm and experiment cross breeding with the new crop of humans. And they would be trying to develop energy systems to use to power their space crafts. Thus they would in very secret ways find scientists among the human population that they can relate to and thus get the help from to build new space crafts. This seems to be what happened in Germany during the Hitler regime as it was in the early 1930’s when Hitler commissioned experimental building of what today look like flying saucers. Hitler also was behind many expeditions to Antarctica where they became aware of a “shangrila” which seems to be related to the North Pole “hollow earth” entry point as surmised from Admiral Byrd’s expedition that reported beings with sophisticated crafts living inside the Earth in a tropical environment that allowed for exit only through the Antartica pole. And so we have the idea of a “bottomless pit” extending from the north to the south pole.

This is an extensive conversation wrought with disinformation but many facts that remain have been surfacing at this time as Jesus said in the end time all things “covered up” would be revealed and as Daniel said, “knowledge ((awareness)) [would be] increased”.

Luk 12:2 For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; neither hid, that shall not be known.

Ti and Do referred to all space aliens as Luciferian because they were all related to the fallen angels that at one time Lucifer was the leader of. Ti indicated that Lucifer was Do’s counterpart and they related an experience Do had in a book store in Portland, Oregon where Do said he saw Lucifer and was alarmed by but knew this was his rival. The Luciferians through the discarnate world seek to influence key humans in high places to motivate them to whatever his agenda. That agenda is to steal souls that were planted by the Next Level to add to their ranks on spacecrafts. Thus we see the numerous contactees starting in the 1940’s and 1950’s but increasing to date, often masquerading as Jesus.

The Luciferians have been so successful in their programs to influence society that what humans think is a normal way to think and act is directly the result of the Luciferian influence. Thus it was just a matter of time before the Luciferian’s influenced the humans in the governments and media and powerful corporations to participate in destroy, eliminate from people’s consideration or even kill any Representatives from the Next Level that come incarnate and attempt to talk honestly about the reality of the Next Level as a non-religious and non-spiritual physical many membered “kingdom” all could choose to apply to evolve into through and with those sent Representatives.

(Peep) TI AND DO (Bo) ARE SUBDUED (overcome):

They at that time on about October 21, 1975, 2-3 days after Walter Cronkites announcement of their vehicles human names and record felt they receive instruction that the strategy had changed so that they were no longer going to be physically killed to demonstrate death overcome as they thought then, though they no idea that prophecy actually depicted these events in the way they experienced, them as I have laid out til here. They were not aware that Ti was to exit her vehicle first or that Ti was the Revelations Woman. Years into the groups forming, but before Ti left her vehicle Do sat us down in the only bible study we ever did in my 19 years with them and without Ti present at the meeting told us that the Revelations 12 Woman was depicting Ti and her task, though he gave us no indication then that she would be leaving soon. He only got through the first couple verses and did not do any word for word translation as I do here. This is not to say Ti and Do didn’t talk about Jesus frequently but never in a quoting of chapter and verse way. When someone is the real deal they don’t need to prove it and they don’t quote what they said in the vehicle they occupied 2000 years ago as their brain doesn’t have that programming in their new vehicle. Do, before he had awakened did attend seminary in New York but was quickly discouraged by what he said was all the limitations of study materials and interpretation he would have been restricted to.

And so Bo and Peep were subdued (overcome), as they felt and said “shot down by the press” through the mouthpiece of the “beast”, initially through the well known CBS network news anchor Walter Cronkite, under that prevailing unseen and unknown influence by the Luciferian space aliens who had infiltrated their mind into all our heads to program us to the norm of life as a human as all there is, except for what became largely illusionary beliefs about an afterlife in some etheric “heaven” on someone else’s effort (Jesus) alone making it attractive to anyone and everyone without the recognition of how each must conquer all their human limiting mammalian roots, behavior and ways AS HE (JESUS) CAME TO TEACH AND BE THE EXAMPLE OF TO DEMONSTRATE WHAT WE MUST ALSO DO TO REAP THE PROMISED REWARD OF BEING WITH HIM IN HIS HEAVENLY KINGDOM, though belief alone in the CURRENT REPRESENTATIVE INCARNATE is a first step, which belief in what Jesus and Moses taught preps us for.

The Luciferian mindset has become so pervasive, it seems obserd that such influences drive our governments, social, religious and spiritual systems. All who give allegience to this systemwide “beast” by their patriotism and loyalty and belief in (mark of the beast in one’s head) and all those who work for or on behalf of this “beast” have accepted their “mark” on their hand, as the hand represents what we WORK FOR and what we believe in and work for is our master and what we actually worship (what Do said really meant “work for” – give service to).

Ti said that even though Lucifer chose repeatedly to go against his “heavenly Father”, (in Ti and Do’s terminology his “Older Member”), “Lucifer is still loved by the Next Level”. I have deduced that Ti was Lucifers Older Member that born him into his partial employ in the Next Level, termed a “watcher”, an elementary type of service designed to give a student experience toward becoming a full fledged member of the Next Level that would include a great deal of further responsabilities according to each graduates desires to serve.

From “’88 Update – The UFO Two and Their Crew”, Do writes about that time when Walter Cronkite broke the news of having discovered their human identities as Marshall Applewhite and Bonnie Nettles:

“Ti and Do were in Las Vegas when the TV network news programs all broke the story about the two. Now because of the kind of publicity that had come out across the country, climaxed by the networks, Ti and Do felt that further meetings were pretty hopeless and people had already made up their minds about how ridiculous this all was.” He follows this writing, “they grieved literally for days, feeling like they had been shot down by the media and the mission was dead”.

Thus the “shooting down by the media” was the exposure of the names of the physical human vehicles they incarnated into that included the fact that Do had served time in jail for what was charged against him as a car theft because of a rental car Ti and Do kept longer than they had planned. Ti and Do said they sent letters to the rental car company explaining how they could not get back to St. Louis where they rented the car but did intend on paying them. Ti also had an arrest, as they were both arrested in Brownsville, Texas about a year before then. The story was that when they had realized that they were fulfilling the prophecy of the Two Witnesses they traveled back to Texas and went to the press telling them they had a “big story” for them. Being Brownsville on the Mexico border, the reporter who took their call figured the story would be a drug tip so he called the police. They showed up at the motel where Ti and Do were staying and Ti and Do who addmitted that they were already very paranoid tried to drive away but were surrounded by police cars and had a helicopter overhead with a megaphone informing them to give up. A year or so earlier while traveling they met with a woman who had believed in them and wanted to help them and who they had seen a number of times in their travels as they stayed in touch. This woman gave Ti her credit card to use. What Ti and Do didn’t know was that the husband of the woman, when he found out that she had given away her credit card reported it stolen. Ti spent a few weeks in jail and the husband dropped the charges and she was released. But even though the credit card company dropped the charges against Do, because of the strange circumstances surrounding Ti and Do’s story, the District attorney decided to prosecute the case anyway. Ti and Do told them who they thought they were. Finally, when it finally came to trial, six months had passed. Do was offerred a plea deal that would have reduced his sentence to 6 months so instead of risking a long drawn out trial, he took the deal and pled guilty and was released with time served. Ti during that time took a nursing job in Houston to earn enough money to pay the lawyer fees. She had been a nurse for premie babies in Houston when she met Do in 1972. At first the idea that he was now a convicted felon bothered them, thinking that they would have no credability. The funny thing Do reported was that to be released he had to pass a psychological exam which he did pass with flying colors even though he said not a day passed that he didn’t question his own sanity. The good thing about Do’s jail terms was that he wrote a paper called, “statement one” that Ti and Do then mailed out to anyone and everyone they thought might be interested which quickly brought them the invitation to speak to the meditation group in Los Angles that started their public meeting period and resulted in followers that they at first were not planning on and were uncomfortable with. They thought they would just tell their story and move on.

The next verse shows how the translation to “kill” steamroles.

Rev 11:8 And their dead bodies *1 ((ruin)) (shall lie)*2 in ((upon)) the street*3 ((wide, spread out plot, open square)) of the great ((large)) city (walled/boundried area)), which spiritually *4 ((non-physically)) is called Sodom and Egypt, where also our Lord was crucified.

*1 dead body = 4430 ptoma pto’-mah
from the alternate of piptw – pipto 4098; a ruin, i.e. (specially), lifeless body (corpse, carrion):–dead body, carcase, corpse.
4098 pipto pip’-to,
peto pet’-o; (which occurs only as an alternate in certain tenses); probably akin to petomai – petomai 4072 through the idea of alighting; to fall (literally or figuratively):–fail, fall (down), light on.

*2 (shall lie) was completely added to complete the idea that their were dead bodies instead of their “ruin”

*3 street = 4113 plateia plat-i’-ah
feminine of platuV – platus 4116; a wide “plat” or “place”, i.e. open square:–street.
4116 platus plat-oos’
from plassw – plasso 4111; spread out “flat” (“plot”), i.e. broad:–wide.
4111 plasso plas’-so
a primary verb; to mould, i.e. shape or fabricate:–form.

*4 spiritually = 4153 pneumatikos pnyoo-mat-ik-oce’
adverb from pneumatikoV – pneumatikos 4152; non-physically, i.e. divinely, figuratively:–spiritually.

Because translators didn’t have the advantage of seeing this after the fact, and made choices to limit the translation to be easier for people to understand, rather than put in as many viable options as possible to let people decide for themselves, the prevailing interpretation of apokteino, that has very little data on was translated to “kill” in most every translation.

Following suite, they also translated the Greek “ptoma” to “dead bodies” when it less specifically means “a ruin”. Considering that Bo and Peep felt for a short time that their mission was ruined (subdued), this then makes a lot more sense though in some context when ptoma is directly referring to a fallen or ruined or dead body it seems appropriate to translate it to “corpse”.

But the translators did not stop there to form their story. Next they added “shall lie” to make sense with “dead body…in street” when “street”, being a “wide, spread out plate or plot was more kin to a public square where the Greek rhume* is used as a lane or alley so is closer to what we call a street today – I guess like “rue” or “route” in French.

*lane, alley or street = 4505 rhume hroo’-may
prolongation from roumai – rhoumai 4506 in its original sense; an alley or avenue (as crowded):–lane, street.

This usage is depicted in; “Go out quickly into the streets and lanes of the city” in:

Luk 14:21 So that servant came, and shewed his lord these things. Then the master of the house being angry said to his servant, Go out quickly into the streets and lanes of the city, and bring in hither the poor, and the maimed, and the halt, and the blind.

And “great city” is more accurately translated as a “big or high or mighty walled populated area”. The use of “great” isn’t used in prophecy causually. There is something special about this city and it’s apparant by the non-physical (spiritual) comparison to both Sodom and the large country Egypt to include Jerusalem in the middle east that this could easily be an area as big as …the United States. This area can’t be Sodom AND Egypt where the Lord was crucified because because it was stated it wasn’t physically these – it was a non-physical representation of these physical places. Thus it is indicating the new area Jesus talked about moving the Kingdom of God/Heaven to, the establishment of a “NEW Jerusalem” that has a NEW name that the U.S. and Los Angeles are quite the prospect of as according to Jesus:

Mat 21:42 Jesus saith unto them, Did ye never read in the scriptures, The stone which the builders rejected, the same is become the head of the corner: this is the Lord’s doing, and it is marvellous in our eyes?
Mat 21:43 Therefore say I unto you, The kingdom of God shall be taken from you, and given to a nation bringing forth the fruits thereof.
Mat 21:44 And whosoever shall fall on this stone shall be broken: but on whomsoever it shall fall, it will grind him to powder.

and

Mat 23:37 O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, thou that killest the prophets, and stonest them which are sent unto thee, how often would I have gathered thy children together, even as a hen gathereth her chickens under her wings, and ye would not!
Mat 23:38 Behold, your house is left unto you desolate.
Mat 23:39 For I say unto you, Ye shall not see me henceforth, till ye shall say, Blessed is he that cometh in the name of the Lord.

and

Rev 3:12 Him that overcometh will I make a pillar in the temple of my God, and he shall go no more out: and I will write upon him the name of my God, and the name of the city of my God, which is new Jerusalem, which cometh down out of heaven from my God: and I will write upon him my new name.

Thus if…

The kingdom of God shall be taken from you, and given to a nation ((1484 ethnos= nation, people, tribe)) bringing forth the fruits thereof.

and…

“Ye [Jerusalem] shall NOT SEE ME henceforth, till ye shall say, Blessed is he that cometh in the name of the Lord.”

and…

…the city of my God, which is new Jerusalem, which cometh down out of heaven…

But if the Two Witnesses are not going to show up in Jerusalem or Egypt or Sodom, but some other physical geographic area of the world, how come so many Christian teachers still think Israel and Jerusalem are where Jesus returns to? The Luciferian space aliens in discarnate form go to anyone teaching these things and masquerade as Jesus. These spirits have more power as they once accumulated Next Level Mind – knowlege as power. They know that human vehicles are easily steered in most any direction by simply appealing to them in some way that they gain popularity among other humans for. And once they become popular they are caught and they can feed them ideas as to interpretations galore and/or even stimulate them to look like fools making false prophecies even in areas these humans know from scripture they “can’t know”. How many preachers have predicted Jesus return on such and such a day when Jesus clearly said even he did not know the exact hour (40 year period). This serves the Luciferians (they think) as when sensible people who see these forcasts then see them not come to pass, they then often think all these false teachers teach is balony and they become agnostics or atheists. However, from the Next Level’s perspective this is all permitted because it shows what someone is made of if they so easily turn away from the records of their teachings.

Of course something not yet spoken of is the contraversy of whether or not the Two Witnesses are incarnations, though even when I use that word incarnate I am often disqualified from having any value to what I say and of course NO ONE has to date that I have found (and I have my feelers out into many places) even suggested that these Two could be both Father and Jesus even though Rev 3:12 says “[Jesus will] write upon him [overcomer] the name of my God” when Jesus clearly spoke of his Father as his God as the term God is a general term to describe a supreme being not a mindset like has been morphed into in Buddhism and Hinduism. If a NEW NAME is being given what’s the need for that if HE is not incarnate to need a name. Even Jehovah gave Moses a name when Moses asked for one and actually Jehovah did demonstrate his physicality (shoulder) to Moses once when he asked to see Him.

There is so much evidence that says, the return of Jesus is a physical one where he is incarnate (“son of man” is a reference to “offspring of human” – that’s born of flesh, the way Moses said the next Representative would come the way they always come to work with their prize “plants”, just like him.

But the Luciferians have so influenced Christians to miss all these and the myrid of signs because they are who were most prepared for Jesus return. And that was done that way for a reason as the Kingdom of God/Heaven are only offerring seats on their crafts to a few…”many are called and few are chosen” so all this delusion serves to seperate the ones who have the most live seed from the Kingdom of God/Heaven still in them from those who don’t and/or don’t want to recognize it as it represents too much change of their comfort level which is perfectly understandable as we each get what we want whether it is an illusion or not.

4) (a) When did the three and a half days pass where the people of the earth were celebrating over their deaths? (b) How is it that their dead bodies were not put into graves? (c) Can you give examples of the celebration and how people felt tormented, and (d) how it ended as the people of the earth were struck with fear when God resurrected the two witnesses?

a) when did the three and a half days pass?

Even though I will assign time periods to the stages in Ti and Do’s awakening, prophecy and overcoming classroom periods as the evidence suggests, these time frames have some built in flexability. With that said, “they of people and kindreds and tongues and nations see their ruin/failure/fall” from October 18, 1976 when Walter Cronkite reveals their human identities that continues a flurry of articles in probably every newspaper and news magazine in the U.S., to include Newsweek on October 20, 1975, Time and Psychology Today for several issues, the New York Times magazine with the cover page article entitled, “Looking for: The Next World”, By JAMES S. PHELAN printed on Feb. 29, 1976, followed by a number of books emerging by 1979 like famous explorer, Jacques Vallee’s entitled, “Messengers of Deception: UFO Contacts and Cults”, published by Ronin, that has a section about Bo and Peep, the UFO Two aka UFO Cult as they were called and one of the later to publish, a grade B movie called “The Mysterious Two” with popular actor John Forsyth playing Bo (Do), released on May 31, 1982 that was about Bo and Peep, calling them by some early names they used, “He and She”. The movie as filled with anything but what really happened. In the movie Bo and Peep are dressed in long white robes, typical religio-spiritual garb, while they really did dress in the equivilent of “sackcloth” as depicted in Rev 11:3, the burlap bags that held wheat berries that the poor used to make clothing with, as opposed to what the religious leaders and governmental leader wore that portrays their stature in the human kingdom that means nothing to the Next Level and is even seen as deceitful as it lures someone to look up to. They wore ordinary plain clothing, windbreakers and causual slacks. They both had short haircuts, almost like a butch cut, but slightly over the ears. They wore no jewelry nor makeup (except Ti felt to blend into the way woman looked so she used a slight hint of eyeliner. Her vehicle had large eyes so the eyeliner also subdued their appearance some. In accordance when they gave a meeting, the didn’t prance around the stage or yell or cry or shout in cadence or do anything more than speak clearly unlike, many evangelicals and preachers that seem to be putting on a show.

So the answer I would give would be 1980-82, seven years after they left their world beind in Houston and Corpus Christi, Texas on January 1, 1973 which is approximately 3 1/2 years after they completed their 1260 days of prophecy, like I’ve detailed before as at the end of the public meetings by mid June 1976 and when they and their under 100 students also left “wilderness” living in tents, and towards the end of this period in trailers, in campgrounds and National Forest and BLM areas and moved into houses in suburban areas of Colorado and Texas. I think it fair to say they never fully left the view of some of the public as there were parents and siblings and spouses of some of the student body always looking for their loves ones and relatives. One of the parents even started a network to try to compare notes to learn where the group was at any given time. Some parents didn’t know if their loved ones were even alive as there were all sorts of rumors abounding, even though we received instruction from Bo and Peep to write to those that might have anxiety about our whereabouts and safety. My vehicle’s mother was one who wondered if I was alive even though I wrote and she received a very lengthy letter telling her about what I was doing and before that I had lived on the other side of the country for 5 years by that time so they were perfectly aware of my adventurous spirit. Every once in a while we would find an article about a dropout from the group who would be contacted by this network and/or investigators that would make it to the press.

ABOUT THE JIM JONES PEOPLE’S TEMPLE MURDERS/FORCED SUICIDES – A LUCIFERIAN FACSIMILI MANY HUMANS HAVE ACCEPTED AS THE SAME AS THE HEAVEN’S GATE GROUP’S “LAYING DOWN” OF THEIR HUMAN LIVES/BODIES WITH THE AUTHORITY TO DO SO AS JESUS HAD WHEN HE LAYED DOWN HIS BODY FOR HIS SHEEP ON HIS FATHER’S INSTRUCTION, TO PLEASE HIM:

Incidentally, the movie The Mysterious Two even depicted a mass suicide of the followers that looked like the mass murder of 918 people stimulated by Jim Jones on November 18, 1978 that did not bear any resembelance to Bo and Peep’s group then nor when they layed down their lives. There are many accounts and tapes and evidence of manipulation galore with threats if they didn’t drink the koolaid, having a gun pointed at them, yelling at them to drink it and OURRIGHT MURDERS and CHILDREN in the Jim Jones case. Jim Jones knew his days were counted by then as he ordered the murders of Senator Ryan a day before the mass murder/suicides. Also the people had been prepped to think drinking the koolaid was a drill like he had done a number of times before in preparation for this moment when they would be interferred with. Plus there were all sorts of reports of very grave abuses of power from Jim Jones and his leadership which is why the Senator went to Guyana to investigate. It was said Jones presided over disciplining children, at least on one occasion by tying a rope to a childs feet and hanging them upside down in a deep, dark water well. Thus I say it was a Luciferian facsimili to lump them into the same mindset of fearing anything remotely different than status quo religion and spirituality. The Luciferians were trying to steal world attention, which they had done many times as they anticipated the Next Level’s next coming incarnate.

Now scripturally speaking, here is how it plays out:

The “three days and a half” is referred to in verse:

Rev 11:9 And they of (the) people and kindreds and tongues and nations shall see their (dead) bodies*1 ((4430 ptoma=ruin, fail, fall (down))) three days ((2250 hemera= to sit, tame, time between dawn and dark, 24 hours, period, years)) and an half*2 ((semi, partition involved in connection)), and shall not suffer their (dead) bodies ((4430 ptoma=ruin, fail, fall (down))) (to be) put in ((to)) graves*3 ((bear in mind, continue, endure, be rewarded, be mindful of, rememberence)).

*1 It was Ti and Do’s physical bodies that had their reputation’s ruined thus this language fits what took place.

*2 half = 2255 hemisu hay’-mee-soo
neuter of a derivative from an inseparable prefix akin to ama – hama 260 (through the idea of partition involved in connection) and meaning semi-; (as noun) half:–half.

*3 to grave = 3418 mnema mnay’-mah
from mnaomai – mnaomai 3415; a memorial, i.e. sepulchral monument (burial-place):–grave, sepulchre, tomb.
3415 mnaomai mnah’-om-ahee
middle voice of a derivative of menw – meno 3306 or perhaps of the base of massaomai – massaomai 3145 (through the idea of fixture in the mind or of mental grasp); to bear in mind, i.e. recollect; by implication, to reward or punish:–be mindful, remember, come (have) in remembrance. Compare mimnhskw – mimnesko 3403.
3306 meno men’-o
a primary verb; to stay (in a given place, state, relation or expectancy):–abide, continue, dwell, endure, be present, remain, stand, tarry (for), X thine own.

As seen in Rev 11:9 above, the first mention of a time period in which the public is observing their ruin is “three days ((period of time or from 12-24 hrs long or as a year)) and half((semi))”. At first interpretation this seemed to refer to the time in which Ti and Do were feeling defeated but that was only referred to by Do as “days” so I thought it was meant to be general and actually that seems to be true and especially with the “half/semi” at the end of the phrase, because it’s kind of inconsistant with Kingdom of God/Heaven depictions of time frames to be talking in terms of human hours that a half of a day would depict. Here is one place where “half” is used to depict time and it’s talking about “silence in heaven” so it would be a heavenly “half hour” or about 20 years by the 1000 yrs. human to 1 day method Jesus disciple Peter wrote about:

Rev 8:1 And when he had opened the seventh seal, there was silence in heaven about the space of half an hour.

The only other places in the New Testament that use the “half” terminology are:

Revelation 11:11 And after three days and an half the spirit of life from God entered into them, and they stood upon their feet; and great fear fell upon them which saw them.

Revelation 12:14 And to the woman were given two wings of a great eagle, that she might fly into the wilderness, into her place, where she is nourished for a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent.

However, there may be some relationship to when this time period ends to the verse:

Rev 12:6 And the woman fled into the wilderness, where she hath a place prepared of God, that they should feed her there a thousand two hundred and threescore days.

Besides these, Ti and Do indicated in their interview with popular science fiction writer Brad Steiger, co-writer of “UFO Missionaries Extraordinary” about them, on January 7, 1976 that, “It is characteristic of the members of the next kingdom to be able to heal their bodies in three and a half days. The fact that we might have to do that demonstration did not come to our minds after reading Jesus’ life. What you don’t realize yet is the reality of the mental communication that we have.”

Plus it is to be noted that 1260 days in Hebrew counting of 360 days for a year is 3 1/2 years, yet nowhere is 3 1/2 years recorded but there are various examples where it seems there are day to a year representations of time frames:

Numbers 14:34 After the number of the days in which ye spied out the land, even forty days, for every day a year, shall ye bear your iniquities, even forty years, and ye shall know my alienation.

Ezekiel 4:6 And again, when thou hast accomplished these, thou shalt lie on thy right side, and shalt bear the iniquity of the house of Judah: forty days, each day for a year, have I appointed it unto thee.

Note: if you study these numbers you will find a myrid of number associations and patterns, many of which I find interesting but too complicated for my brain and energy. However, I do believe 100% that the Older Member’s crew employed to lay out the strategies for garden/soul development have a plan and they seem to associate the teachings they give with the number of new members they are seeking to harvest from their garden, which is according to grades in their overcoming of humanness school. And these numbers then become the foundation for time references so humans can see the patterns and they also have a repetitive nature to them, cycles so that we can see their application over the history of the garden experiment. 3 1/2 is just one such pattern that is of course half of the greater pattern of 7 pertaining to the 7 Candlesticks which are the seven oldest students the Two are grooming to carry on future gardening projects. However, with that said, we can get so entwined in the numbers that we miss the purpose of them, to help us see the way it’s all been planned to help us recognize the truth. If we only look at all the number associations we miss all the consistancies in behavior and ways that are a larger part of the plan for potential new fruit but of course is more challenging to consider as we then have to face whether or not we are willing to change, though it’s always provided with helps and administered in a gradual and gentle manner by the Older Members and their crews as They know we are more or less babies.

*******
b) How is it that their dead bodies were not put into graves?
*******

At this point they hadn’t physically “died” yet because “dead bodies” was a mistranslation when it should have simply been “ruined/fallen” or “ruined/fallen (bodies)” and then “graves” indicating that there was no “bearing in mind, continuence, endurance, rewarding, mindfullness of, rememberence of what they had to say”, only that they were Mind controlling charlatans who thought they were taking people to space on a UFO that were tied into new age devil thinking so were not to be paid any mind to.

*******
c) Can you give examples of the celebration and how people felt tormented?
*******

First off, there was no “celebration”. This is the impression given by the translations of how the people “rejoice and make merry and send gifts” but those translations are far afield as is detailed below. However, here are a few examples of how people were “glad or happy” by the news that cleared up the mystery:

From UFO Missionaries Extraordinary:

Max Pavesic says on page 30: “I feel relieved knowing who they are and having the mystery cleared up”.

Regarding how these Two’s presence tormented people – in this case someone who joined for a brief time obviously proving that they didn’t have quite the “hold” on people that some claimed:

On page 32, “Ms Simross also quoted a Houston housewife as saying ‘I would do anything in my power to keep anyone else from going through what I have. It is obvious that these people are on an ego trip. They have set themselves out to be something important. There is a danger of suicide for the followers. They are suicidal anyway, having already killed off their lives as they have known them. When I was involved with them I thought about suicide many times myself.”

(Note: That is a strange report as Bo and Peep at that time were clearly saying that only they would HAVE TO die as prophesied in the Rev 11 Two Witnesses account. They said we would be physically picked up by a Next Level spacecraft when we had completed our metamorphosis. As I traveled around spreading their message, I told a number of people I would not die even though a part of me thought I would and even wanted to be a martyr. Ti and Do later told us this was not a martyr trip, though many of us felt we might get bumped off by those who hated what we were saying, (possibly a genetic and soul body rememberence of past experiences). As it turned out, the death they said we would not experience was the death of our souls. The Soul is what Jesus said was to be born by falling down into the ground in His example of a seed having to fall to the ground to be able to sprout a new shoot. It’s the physical body that must die to produce fruit because having been willing to spread what Jesus said would be met by the same kind of hatred Jesus received, which he said his disciples would also receive. Jesus even layed down his life and said that “no man takes it from me”. He also said he was laying down his life for his Father because his Father asked him to, for the sake of Their sheep the student body. Jesus said that his disciples would have to drink the same cup (of his blood) as he was choosing to drink, a reference to allowing his body’s life to be taken. All humans die and should strive to live as long as possible to learn all the lessons they can, but when some recognize the return of their Older Member incarnate, then they know if the life of their body is required of them to give then they are willing to give it in whatever way their Older Member get’s instruction from their Older Member to “exit” their incarnation. But there was no talk in the classroom about “taking it upon ourselves to exit the task – lay down our human bodies” until September of 1994 after we completed nine months of the “second wave” of looking for lost sheep, after 17 years of not looking or accepting any new members, another of the many unique characteristics to Ti and Do’s task leadership. No children was another.)

The verse to which these questions apply:

Rev 11:10 And (they that) dwell*1 ((inhabit)) upon (the) earth*2 ((country, region)) (shall) rejoice*3 ((cheer, happy, glad (to say farewell))) over ((1909 epi= about, after)) them ((846 autos= these things)), and (make) merry*4 ((put in a good frame of mind)), and ((2532 kai= when)) (shall) send*5 ((dispatch, transmit, bestow)) gifts*6 ((presented, given, offerred, bestowed)) (one to) another ((240 allelon= each other)); because ((3754 hoti= concerning)) these two prophets ((4396 prophetes= fortellers’, inspired speakers)) tormented*7 ((pain, toil)) (them that) dwelt on (the) earth*2 ((country, region)).

Rewritten to:

Rev 11:10 And they that inhabit the country shall cheer and be glad to say farewell about them/these things and are put in a good frame of mind when dispatch (media) transmissions are presented, given, offerred to each other concerning these two prophetically inspired speaker cause pain and toil on those that inhabit the country.

*1 dwell = 2730 katoikeo kat-oy-keh’-o
from kata – kata 2596 and oikew – oikeo 3611; to house permanently, i.e. reside (literally or figuratively):–dwell(-er), inhabitant(-ter).

*2 earth = 1093 ge ghay
contracted from a primary word; soil; by extension a region, or the solid part or the whole of the terrene globe (including the occupants in each application):–country, earth(-ly), ground, land, world.

*3 rejoice = 5463 chairo khah’-ee-ro
a primary verb; to be “cheer”ful, i.e. calmly happy or well-off; impersonally, especially as salutation (on meeting or parting), be well:–farewell, be glad, God speed, greeting, hall, joy(- fully), rejoice.

*4 merry = 2165 euphraino yoo-frah’-ee-no
from eu – eu 2095 and frhn – phren 5424; to put (middle voice or passively, be) in a good frame of mind, i.e. rejoice:–fare, make glad, be (make) merry, rejoice.

*5 send = 3992 pempo pem’-po
apparently a primary verb; to dispatch (from the subjective view or point of departure, whereas hiemi (as a stronger form of eimi) refers rather to the objective point or terminus ad quem, and stellw – stello 4724 denotes properly, the orderly motion involved), especially on a temporary errand; also to transmit, bestow, or wield:–send, thrust in.
4724 stello stel’-lo
probably strengthened from the base of isthmi – histemi 2476; properly, to set fast (“stall”), i.e. (figuratively) to repress (reflexively, abstain from associating with):–avoid, withdraw self.

*6 gift = 1435 doron do’-ron a present; specially, a sacrifice:–gift, offering.

1431 dorea do-reh-ah’ from dwron – doron 1435; a gratuity:–gift.
1432 dorean do-reh-an’ accusative case of dwrea – dorea 1431 as adverb; gratuitously (literally or figuratively):–without a cause, freely, for naught, in vain.
1433 doreomai do-reh’-om-ahee middle voice from dwron – doron 1435; to bestow gratuitously:–give.
1434 dorema do’-ray-mah from dwreomai – doreomai 1433; a bestowment:–gift.

*7 tormented = 928 basanizo bas-an-id’-zo
from basanoV – basanos 931; to torture:–pain, toil, torment, toss, vex.
931 basanos bas’-an-os
perhaps remotely from the same as basiV – basis 939 (through the notion of going to the bottom); a touch-stone, i.e. (by analogy) torture:–torment.
939 basis bas’-ece
from baino (to walk); a pace (“base”), i.e. (by implication) the foot:–foot.

Yes, there was a great deal of relief when Walter Cronkite made that annoucement of the names Marshall Herff Applewhite and Bonnie Lu Truesdale Nettles as the “mysterious two”. One can only imagine how disturbed many were at the ideas these Two presented and the fact that dozens of what ended up being people from various ages and lifestyles were leaving all behind to join them for this bizarre trip to what…? Many feared they were being kidnapped. Others feared they were entrapped like the Manson followers. Many thought their was fowl play and they would be found dead. Not knowing their names left it all up in the air as to how to find and apprehend them to learn what their gimic was. Some claimed they exercised powerful mind control over people. Some claimed they appeared and disappeared, (which Ti and Do later said was funny as they were not aware of anything supernatural to their actions. However, they would not necessarily know if their Next Level helpers did something at times to impress someone. That’s just something I wondered when I read what for instance Hayden Hewes said about how they just seemed to appear and dissappear when they came to visit him in ihis Oklahoma City office).

Again, here is one example of the kind of fear one early follower had in their regard as she didn’t really follow with them and organized a group to work against them, so one can easily surmise her celebration when the mystery was solved:

From the book, “UFO Missionaries Extraordinary”, by Hayden Hewes and Brad Steiger, published by Pocket Books, June 1976, it states;

“Mrs. Culpepper emphasized that in her opinion Bo and Peep were dangerous. They were not run of the mill con artists. ‘They have tremendous mental power. It is not hypnosis. It is thought transplant. They can do it in a matter of minutes.'”

“Sheriff’s departments and other police officals admitted that they didn’t know what kind of affair they might be dealing with. They didn’t know whether the whole thing was a fraud or whether the people who had disappeared might have been killed. Rumors were flying. Some suggested their was human sacrifice and that this was but another elaborate plot that had been sponsored by the Charles Manson family. The mystery was spreading: commentators were speculating: the man on the street was disturbed.”

“…a man and a woman allegedly from outer space luring troubled Earthlings to the desert, to the mountains, to the forest to meet with a UFO and be transported to another world.”

“It seemed like the ultimate escapists dream. Things are lousy on Earth – let’s hope the Space Brothers come along and blast us off this rotting mudball!”

A woman who said her son had joined shows police a postcard she received that said, “I am leaving this earth and will not see you anymore”.

(Note: Ti and Do would certainly not have approved such a note – they were never inconsiderate of others and I saw that over 19 years with them and they talked about some of these stories.)

“…media coverage was getting a bit hairy. It spoke of a middle-aged couple with “hollow-looking eyes” whose offers of a trip to eternity on a UFO were definitely sinister one-way rides.”

“It was said that “The Two,” as they were now beginning to be called, had persuaded their followers that the way to attain the higher life they sought was through fasting. A concerned relative of one of the missing people said, “They might just all starve to death”.

(Note: 12 Years later we did do some fasting but in between those times we always had plenty to eat. In the first couple months though while there was no central organization and there were people of varied interest joining, people did what they wanted. I remember when Ti and Do learned that some were visiting dumpsters behind donut shops (which I admit I participated in doing a time or two, as they threw out all the day old donuts still in their boxes so they looked perfectly good to eat), they were outraged and said they would not have approved of doing that).

“a West Allis, Wisconsin woman told authorities that she feared for the life of her nineteen-year-old chronically ill daughter, who, she believed, had become involved in the bizarre religious cult that promised life after death through bodily ascension into heaven by means of a UFO….”I am really afraid for her life, I really am”.

(Note: Ti and Do never spoke in terms such as “bodily ascension” that I heard or read in their writings though they did say then that prospective candidates wouldn’t have to die to go to the Next Kingdom as was taught by most Christians then. And they did feel that people would be picked up by a spacecraft. UFO was not their terminology as it was too sensationalist sounding, but students designed posters to advertise meetings and used them without checking first with them so UFO became a type of signature that they then followed along with.)

A woman wrote in a letter that she “would have to end all communication with her family–on orders of the couple”.

(Note: This was part of the program to seperate from one’s past entirely, though after tieing up loose ends and trying not to leave a mess which would have included not leaving someone too distressed. However, there is only so much one can do to keep another from being distressed when one wants to do something others see as foolish or naive or stupid, all of which were common ways those left behind saw their choices to follow with these Two. As Jesus said to the man who didn’t want to leave his Father unti his father died, “let the dead bury the dead”. That would have seemed pretty harsh, yet direct and real to the task Jesus had. It was clear that Jesus disciples left all behind to follow him. Jesus even talked about how one’s enemies would be those in one’s own household. Jesus wasn’t murdered because he was loved. Few loved him. He said he didn’t come to bring peace but a sword, one from his mouth that by his instruction would cause followers to sever their ties (roots) to their families to include children and possessions, parents, etc. We were to have peace in the way we interacted with one another but not if they sought to keep us from giving our full allegience to the Kingdom of God/Heaven. Then they represent the voice of our advasary (satan) though it’s not their fault so they are not condemned if they don’t know better but we would have to come to “hate” anything that would try to dissuade us from following with our Older Members when they put out the call (trumpet).)

“…they scared us into a lot of things by emphasizing that if we ‘understand’ and decide to leave, we’ll never be allowed another chance.”

(note: This does not sound like Ti and Do at all. It was not part of their vocabulary to give people ultimatums. In fact they talked some out of joining and over they years sent many away from the group that had wanted to be in the group because they didn’t think they were prepared to do what it would take. 19 were sent away in October of 1976 yet several of these found their way back to the group some 7 or so years later, proving they did have what it took, which Ti and Do were very happy to receive them back again.)

“As if people didn’t have enough to worry about in connection with the mysterious cult, stories in the press began to link them to the mysterious cattle mutilations that had been plaguing farmers for the previous several months. A story datelined Fox Lake, Illinois, October 15, said the police had found two cattle slaughtered and mutilated at about the same time that the fifty-plus member cult of UFO people had camped nearby.”

(Note: If one studies these rashes of cattle mutilations during that time period one will find they are extraordinarily strange for their lack of blood, no tracks, percision laser like surgeon cuts that just removed reproductive organs and eyes, etc. I know for a fact none of us were engaged in anything of the sort. We were busy organizing meetings and finding help from churches with our expenses as Ti and Do instructed us to “test” the churches because we were working for our Heavenly Father. We were instructed to ask for our needs and that we were willing to work for the help but that our primary task right now was sharing new information about the Kingdom of God/Heaven. Then if we were asked for more info about what the new info was, we’d share it. If we were not asked, we’d go about our way whether they helped us or not. When I first did this I was not liking to do so and never actually did, but I did believe in what I was doing so it was far more important to share the truth with someone that asked than to receive the food or gasoline they might not give when they would hear we were disciples of these Two.)

There are many examples that should show without a doubt that upon revealing their names at least the public would have ceased to fear them because without names and identities one’s imagination can run wild with fear of the unknown. However, those who had loved ones in the group still had that fear, but not all. Some parents and siblings and spouses knew their loved ones were not someone easily led and they were adults so could choose what they wanted. Some even supported others joining feeling that they simply didn’t feel ready which Ti and Do even told some, unheard of for “cult” leaders. And don’t forget Jesus was not any less seen as a “cult” leader in his day. The reason he was captured and murdered for no crime but a so called religious crime of blasphemy, was, yes, because he stimulated hatreds by telling the truth about who he was and represented and was bringing updates from, but from the perspective of the Luciferian driven high priests of the Jewish sects, he endangered their hold on their constituency as was clearly stated. They feared they’d lose their followers and thus their lofty, cushy status and lifestyles, fooled into thinking their congregations were their flock to tend and protect, which of course was true, but not as the Next Level saw it that Jesus clearly deliniated. Instead their followers were being protected from the One True God they thought they represented. The same is true today. Ti and Do said that all the players from 2000 years ago are back, as Jesus said, some to eternal life (Membership in the Kingdom of God/Heaven or saved for the next experiment towards that Membership) and some to eternal damnation (having spirit/soul and body recycled), by their own choices of who to give allegience to, the Next Level Older Members last incarnate (God/Father and God/Son (as every member of the Kingdom of God/Heaven is as Jesus said compared to a human a “god”, “greater than the greatest human”)).

A LITTLE MORE BACKGROUND ON THE RESURRECTION AND THE LUCIFERIAN REBELLION

Like Jesus said, they would all be back at the time of his return – the resurrection of the just AND the unjust. Resurrection means to “stand up again” – a literal standing upon one’s human legs which could only happen in two ways. 1) Genetically, as leaves off a human tree, each leaf during the course of life feeds all it’s experiences to the branch, that with each new season and generation of leaves brings forth the same mindset those leaves had when they died as once dead no changes are possible to the branch. 2) For those who were actually given “seeds”, what Ti and Do called “deposits”, literally “souls” as a human body has it’s own “spirit/mind” that grows with the physical body, starting off with it’s genetic propensities (what the last leaves accumulated). Such a human without a soul deposit is a mortal as they have far less potential to relate to the new incarnate Older Member from the Next Level and so they are also not expected by the Next Level to make the same choices. But for those who are given that soul seed deposit, more is expected as more has been given (as Jesus spoke to). So if they reject the new incarnate Older Member among them, they become aligned with the Luciferians.

Remember the Luciferians are not pitch forked, fire breathing, evil looking. They are literally souls who received their deposit while in a human or human equivilent physical body, even before the current civilization and/or actually on a different planet entirely, but where they had equivilent to human kingdom experiences in overcoming. And they were in a Next Level Overcoming program with an incarnate Older Member to such a degree that when their human or human equivilent body died, their Soul was “saved” and in some cases given another physical body they could use to learn additional lessons in preparation for their next trimester towards a “soul (translated to spirit in the gospels) birth”. A birth into an eternal Next Level made vehicle(body) is generally accomplished over three trimesters. The first trimester was the Jehovah/Moses experience, the second the Father/Jesus experience and the third the same Older Members as the Two Witnesses/martyrs experience. (Witness is from the Greek “martus” because part of the program is to GIVE ONES LIFE in every way). Thus if a Soul graduated a trimester and the Next Level determined that they could be given a new body to use in Their service in an elementary task to show the Next Level Older Members what lessons they still needed to learn, they would become “watchers” (what Enoch talked about) – assigned a spacecraft and instruction on who, what, when and where to watch (observe) and report their observations. This is an elementary task because if they don’t stray from it, they can’t do any harm to those they are assigned to observe. But the physical bodies these are issued are still capable of human behavior and ways that they have not yet fully overcome/conquered as one hasn’t overcome until the incarnate Older Member during the third trimester deems they have overcome. It’s a literal training program as the Next Level do not need new members so the members they select will be the cream of the crop as determined by each upcoming souls efforts to abide in the current incarnate Older Member’s program that is consistant with all previous incarnations of those Older Members. So as the story goes in Genesis 6, these “sons of God” being humans deposited with souls seeds that were still in process but did show promise, found the mortal human women fair and chose to cohabitate with some which resulted in children as these “sons” sought to reject their instructions from their Older Member to have their own way and the name that was their ringleader at the time was “Lucifer” – “angel of light”, a very refined Soul that chose a path that isolated him from the Next Level, so he and those that sided with him became prisoners on Earth as the Next Level weren’t going to allow them to have any further access to Next Level areas of the “heavens” – the cloaked to human local habitation for the crews of the Next Level working the garden experiment. Then because of the choices of these who “fell” and were thereby “cast” – restricted to Earth, the Next Level decided to use them by subjecting young Souls to their influence as a testing ground for upcoming members, hence the Adam/Eve experiment beginning. They flunked the test which began the current civilization as they had to learn for themselves the value of the benefits to Next Level membership.

*******
(d) how it ended as the people of the earth were struck with fear when God resurrected the two witnesses?
*******

Their “standing up again” (resurrection) occurs as it says AFTER they are subdued/ruined, what they felt was “shot down by the press” and that ruin was observed by the public til at least May 31st 1982 with the coming out of the movie, The Mysterious Two. By the way, that couldn’t have been a worse misrepresentation of anything Ti and Do were about. Note how the English word “resurrection” came to represent “rising from the dead”, which it does mean indirectly. Humans are all dead until the Next Level gives them a piece of their mind as a soul deposit (seed) because with it and subsequent experiences with incarnate Older Member(s) they will die and never know the further opportunity to “stand again”. So Resurrection has two parrallel meanings:

1) To stand up again, which has to do with having one’s Soul body brought back by the Next Level, which is completely bibical. Jesus said he had lived before the world began, where World can be referring to the current civilization or the entire planet. Jesus said that John the Baptist was the one spoken of as the “messenger sent before His face” named Elias before he was John the Baptist. Jesus told his disciples they would see him again when he came back in the new age. Jesus was coming back as a “son of man” (offspring human). This is NOT reincarnation though this is where the entire idea of reincarnation came from and was like everything distorted. Each human has only one spirit and potentially one soul if that human is deposited with a soul. When that human dies, that spirit and/or soul either merges into the spirit world or is met by Next Level workers who take that soul to “abrahams bosum” or aka “paradise”, technically in a part of the heavens but not an adult member of the Kingdom of Gods in the literal heavens as it generally takes severel experiences taking over a prepared human vehicle to overcome all one’s human behaviors and ways as required to become a full fledged adult in the Next Level.

This standing up has to do with taking over (conquering all it’s human behaviors and ways) a new human vehicle assigned for you to take over by your Older Member with your participation in the choice.

2) It means “standing up for one’s master”, between an Older Member (God) who was last incarnate or for what Jesus called in English, Mammon from mammonous in the Greek related to “treasure” but basically entails the entire human kingdom, so it’s what you make your treasure. Even Kingdom of God/Heaven stimulated behaviors and ways among humans eventually become at best stepping stones to get one to a relationship with an incarnate Older Member. Once bonding/grafting to that Older Member one can not still give any time and energy to anything else, even if it was “loving ones’ neighbor as oneself”, say by being a humanitarian as at such a time one must give All their heart, All their Mind, All their Soul and All theri strenght to that incarnate Older Member. Without the Older Member incarnate it’s impossible to realistically give one’s All to that one person as one would not have a totally real example and teacher to show us what giving our all actually is. Ti and Do always said, if they didn’t need to come incarnate, they certainly would have took care of the classroom from the comfort of their spacecraft and if they let you see that spacecraft we’d be motivated by that proof as opposed to motivated by “faith” which is a choice to build or not and building only takes place by experience with the incarnate Older Member.

This standing up means giving service to one’s Older Member using one’s assigned human vehicle which is engaged when the Older Member gives insruction to share the information they brought, or to do any task they ask of you. This is where the expression comes from, to “stand up for” someone or something.

In accomplishing either of these one has “risen from the dead” as humans who don’t do this are destined to death and eventually the “second death”, the dissolving of the already dead to Next Level mind/spirit and/or soul in the “lake of fire”.

Note: on the word “accomplishing”, some Christians have been taught it’s a naughy word because they think Jesus did it all for us and if we therefore try to accomplish anything we are not accepting his gift of dying for our sins. This is a huge twist by the Luciferians but is rooted in truth as so many things the Luciferians have us twist. We adide in Their love if we ONLY try to accomplish the our Older Members give us to accomplish. We can become ascetics or monks/nuns and do nothing but pray or meditate all day, fast often, live by all the rules, help the poor, help cure the sick, give ourselves to others 24/7 and yet when the Older Member comes incarnate, if we are not willing to put all those things aside to go with and be with that Older Member, we miss out. Ti instructed us to make our committments to Do before she left. She said he was uncomfortable asking for our committment to him even though he knew we needed to give it to him just as he needed to give his committment to Ti. Ti never told Do, she was his Older Member. He learned it in the first year or so with Ti day and night and he said he gave Ti a real hard time coming to recognize who she was.

Thus if they want us to eat ice cream all day and we do it we are abiding in their love during that time we are following their instruction. They probably wouldn’t give us stupid things to do but they will give us fun things to do. They are not against fun. They simply want us to want to do only the things they consider fun. Ti and Do said, “the Lord wants you to have nice things. He just doesn’t want you to want them”. So this is why our Older Members give us commandments and instructions, behaviors and ways as it is by taking all these to heart that we draw their “Holy Mind” into us and then we are abiding in them and they are abiding in us. When we draw ONLY their mind, we are then like little children trusting them 100% and they will never abuse that. They actually only want that committment so they can trust us with the keys to the kingdom where upon entrance we are provided a myrid of departments to work in as nothing is automatic that was not once designed to be automatic and everything can possibly be improved upon and even though the Older Members can do many tasks themselves, they don’t want to. They would rather let the younger members do them so they can grow to become Older Members and even bear younger members into the Next Level.

Scriptures about resurrection:

Mar 12:25 For when they shall rise* from the dead, they neither marry, nor are given in marriage; but are as the angels which are in heaven.
Mar 12:26 And as touching the dead, that they rise: have ye not read in the book of Moses, how in the bush God spake unto him, saying, I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob?
Mar 12:27 He is not the God of the dead, but the God of the living: ye therefore do greatly err.

*rise = 450 anistemi an-is’-tay-mee
from ana – ana 303 and isthmi – histemi 2476; to stand up (literal or figurative, transitive or intransitive):–arise, lift up, raise up (again), rise (again), stand up(-right).

Mat 22:30 For in the resurrection* they neither marry, nor are given in marriage, but are as the angels of God in heaven.
Mat 22:31 But as touching the resurrection of the dead, have ye not read that which was spoken unto you by God, saying,
Mat 22:32 I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob? God is not the God of the dead, but of the living.

*resurrection = 386 anastasis an-as’-tas-is
from anisthmi – anistemi 450; a standing up again, i.e. (literally) a resurrection from death (individual, genitive case or by implication, (its author)), or (figuratively) a (moral) recovery (of spiritual truth):–raised to life again, resurrection, rise from the dead, that should rise, rising again

With this said, the way in which Ti and Do and by the way, their student body, who are with them throughout these times as it is for them that they came and were incarnate and dealing with the Luciferians, etc. “stand up again” is by gradually building to the “second wave” of face to face sharing of Ti and Do’s information/Mind with the public.

Before the face to face public meetings again, Do took us through many projects as he wasn’t sure Ti wanted us to go public again and Ti wasn’t in her vehicle to ask, so he would ask her privately with his mind. The way they communicated was seldom with a clear answer. It is not like a channeler or a psychic or like a contactee or by some type of automatic writing and we didn’t use tarot cards or weegee boards or any other spiritual paraphenelia. Nor was it through dreams though dreams were considered lesson times to prepare one for the next day’s lessons though we only shared dreams with one another if Ti and Do instigated our doing so and it was seldom and we never tried to interpret them. Occasionally Ti and Do would share one of their dreams and we’d wonder what it meant. The communication came as a thought and they would have to “pull” on that thought to understand all it represented. Sometimes this would take days, weeks, months and years to understand. Pulling was not only mental but trying things. It might be a thought that we needed to move that they later learned was due to a private investigator hired by an x-family member to find someone. To honor such a thought, they would try to seek where they might want to move to. That would take them to the idea of a town or direction. So they’d drive off in that direction to check out how it felt when they got there. Sometimes they later learned they needed to leave so we the student body could deal with our advasaries without Ti and Do’s more powerful minds around to ward them off for us, something we didn’t even know they were often doing which is kin to Jesus running off evil spirits.

With this in mind, after Ti had exited her incarnation, Do began to feel there was still more we could do publically. So Do had us follow though on a book Ti started us on called the Transfiguration Diet, by Littlegreen, Inc. Think Tank. He also said we had to be who were were, referring to the identity of being the return of the One called Jesus and his disciples. He was not saying he was Jesus as Jesus was the body He now as Do took then. That’s what he was saying. Then he also started a video group who would go to UFO conventions and symposiums to do interviews with leading researchers. Then he began writing the book entitled, “’88 Update – The “UFO TWO” and their Crew” that was designed to set the records straight from what was wrongly stated in the press about He and Ti’s efforts in the 70’s. Then he had us start video projects with classmembers doing the talking. June and Sawyer were chosen and there was even a consideration of sending them out to talk to the public again. But then Do felt instruction from Ti, who was outside her vehicle that said he needed to do the videos and that became the 12 hour “Beyond Human – The Last Call” series. When we started this series our numbers were down to 25 students if I recall right. I remember this because when we began to consider various public projects, they also included writing projects and a few of us gravitate to studying scripture, something we didn’t do hardly at all before then. That’s when I came upon the talk of the 24 elders in Revelations and thought that must be those remaining but we never talked about it as it was unimportant. And then there was the 1/3 of a page advertisement in USA Today, national and international addition followed by similar ads in new age newspapers all over the U.S., Canada and in Australia, New Zealand, and England. And we did some correspondence with people from all these places and with people in prisons and we’d send them a Beyond Human tape. However, in doing all this it seemed we all wanted to go out face to face again.

So Do obliged us. On 1/1/1994 we officially “stood upon our feet” to do another 9 month round of public meetings. I can’t actually recall any alarm or fearful public reactions to our re-emergence but I don’t doubt for a minute that someone reading a poster or article or hearing/seeing a Radio and/or TV spot, as we did plenty wouldn’t have had stimulated some unpleasant or alarming memories as no one was particularily fond of us. If anything it seemed we were ignored but ignoring can often be a fearful response.

Do did not give any meetings. They were all done by students and we nearly doubled the numbers though some dropped away soon after to arrive at 38 by March of 1997. No doubt all who knew of the 1975-76 public meetings and thorough media coverage of Bo and Peep would have been watching all this unfold with a certain amount of distress as the UFO Cult was back and that really came to a head when they laid down their lives in March of 1997 with the timing of the very, very unusual Hale Bopp Comet and companion.

This question refers to verse:

Rev 11:11 And after*1 ((3326 meta= accompanying, amid, among, following, hence, hereafter, since)) three days*2 (2250 hemera= sitting/tamed periods of time) and (an) half*3 ((semi day/period)) (the) spirit ((mental disposition, quickening (life energy), blast of mind))*4 of life*5 from God ((2316 theos = the general name of deities or divinities)) entered into them and (they) stood ((2476 histemi= upheld, continued, committed)) upon ((1909 epi= towards, because of)) their ((the other persons (followers/students upcoming harvest))) feet ((4228 pou= footstool)) and ((2532 kai= both)) great ((3173 megas= large, big)) fear ((5401 phobos= alarm, fright)) fell ((4098 pipto= of falling)) upon ((because of)) (that which they) saw ((2334 theoreo= (were the)spectators, beholder, looked on, perceived, saw))

*1 after = 3326 meta met-ah’
a primary preposition (often used adverbially); properly, denoting accompaniment; “amid” (local or causal); modified variously according to the case (genitive association, or accusative succession) with which it is joined; occupying an intermediate position between apo – apo 575 or ek – ek 1537 and eiV – eis 1519 or proV – pros 4314; less intimate than en – en 1722 and less close than 4862):–after(-ward), X that he again, against, among, X and, + follow, hence, hereafter, in, of, (up-)on, + our, X and setting, since, (un-)to, + together, when, with (+ -out). Often used in composition, in substantially the same relations of participation or proximity, and transfer or sequence.

*2 days = 2250 hemera hay-mer’-ah
feminine (with wra – hora 5610 implied) of a derivative of hemai (to sit; akin to the base of 1476) meaning tame, i.e. gentle; day, i.e. (literally) the time space between dawn and dark, or the whole aganakthsiV – aganaktesis 24 hours (but several days were usually reckoned by the Jews as inclusive of the parts of both extremes); figuratively, a period (always defined more or less clearly by the context):–age, + alway, (mid-)day (by day, (-ly)), + for ever, judgment, (day) time, while, years.

Interestingly that it states it’s a period of time in which they are “sitting, kin to “tame”, that one can picture a “classroom” which is what Ti and Do called the environment of the overcoming process.

*3 half = 2255 hemisu hay’-mee-soo
neuter of a derivative from an inseparable prefix akin to ama – hama 260 (through the idea of partition involved in connection) and meaning semi-; (as noun) half:–half.

In five references to the usage (context) of this word’s translation to “half” in the New Testement it is referring to a partition or semi portion of a kingdom or one’s goods or of a “short” season (times) as in Rev. 12:14.

*4 Spirit = 4151 pneuma pnyoo’-mah
from pnew – pneo 4154; a current of air, i.e. breath (blast) or a breeze; by analogy or figuratively, a spirit, i.e. (human) the rational soul, (by implication) vital principle, mental disposition, etc., or (superhuman) an angel, demon, or (divine) God, Christ’s spirit, the Holy Spirit:–ghost, life, spirit(-ual, -ually), mind. Compare yuch – psuche 5590.

*5 life = 2222 zoe dzo-ay’
from zaw – zao 2198; life (literally or figuratively):–life(-time). Compare yuch – psuche 5590.

5) When did the two witnesses ascend to heaven and how did the people of the earth take notice?

a) When did the Two Witnesses ascend to heaven?

First off, if it wasn’t clear, it was back in verse:

Rev 11:7 And when they shall have finished their testimony ((perform)), the beast ((venomous animals)) that ascendeth ((climb)) out of the bottomless pit ((underground depths)) shall make war ((battle)) against them, and shall overcome ((subdue)) them, and kill ((separate(exit) by/from/because of death of the vehicle they had incarnated into)) them ((and/or themselves)).

So to spell it out this is saying the “Beast” defined as “venomous animals” (the Luciferian fallen angels (discarnate and with those who are their descendants “space aliens”, that had been forced underground (pit) to hide from an Earth recycling period til they were released (Rev 9:1 in the 1940’s and 1950’s), and all humans and their organizations who they are the ancestral fathers of genetically, that includes the myrid of evidence of the human equivilent space aliens in and around the Earth) that battle (by thought, word and deed) against the Two Witnesses and in so doing subue/conquer them (in that battle) and then at some point thereafter these Two “exit their physical bodies” they incarnated into, as depicted by the interpretation of the Greek “apokteino” where “apo”=”separate, complete, cease, take away or off from” and “kteino” = death (of the physical body), thus “separate by/from/because of death”.

Thus I am saying the SUBUING was when the U.S. authorities through the media solved the mystery of the identity of these Two who for over a month were sought after as responsible for 20+ people flat leaving their lives behind suddenly after attending a meeting in Waldport, Oregon on September 14, 1975 to allegedly meet up with a UFO to be taken to heaven in outer space. When they finally identified the human identities of those who were only then called Bo and Peep (who later changed their names to Do and Ti) as Marshall Herff Applewhite and Bonnie Lu Truesdale Nettles and saw that both had a recent arrest record and that Do was actually a convicted felon (thief in the night), even though it was a misunderstanding because they used a credit card of an early follower whose husband reported it stolen and they kept a rental car beyond the agreement, both of which complaints were dropped but because of the strange situation of who Ti and Do said they were, giving authorities Sanskrit names; Shril Pravanah (Do) and Shakti Devi (Ti) that a Buddist Monk named, Nor Bu Chin who took a liking to them gave them, (that was during a time they used lots of names like, Tiddly and Wink, Chip and Dale, Winnie and Pooh and eventually settled on Bo and Peep because of the nursery rhyme that they were shepherds of sheep and then finally Do and Ti). However, the district attorney in St Louis where they initially rented the car decided to prosecute anyway, it seemed to Do to make points for re-election. When it was finally going to come to trial, 6 months had passed with Do in jail so he copped a plea that had a 4 month sentence so he could get out right away. Because of this being exposed on National Television and media they felt the prophecy of their being “killed” in the “street” was their mission being shot dead because they weren’t operating on the basis of prophecy, except in knowing that the Two Witnesses were depicting their task.

Thus what I am saying is that their ascension (rising up) was depicting when their Soul bodies exited the prepared human bodies they had borrowed/taken over for their task. The way this was depicted by the original translators/interpreters was as a repeat Jesus death and resurrection but what they didn’t know was that no such demonstration was necessary this time as the disciples with Jesus needed to experience that reality and since they were returning after giving their human lives in service to Jesus they were taking off from where they left off in their growth and that was equipt with more faith and recognition of their “shepherds voice” to where when they heard about Ti and Do or saw them talk they didn’t give joining with them a second thought.

Now, since Ti exited her human vehicle before and in a different way from Do and the student body and in the one time Do actually led a brief bible study it had to do with Revelations chapter 12, that he said depicted Ti, and since Do knew Ti to be his Older Member and “heavenly Father” and the same One who was referred to by Jesus as his “Father” (in heaven, as he wasn’t incarnate then), I sought to prove that the Father was slated to return and surfaced the following:

Rev 14:1 And I looked, and, lo, a Lamb stood on the mount Sion, and with him an hundred forty and four thousand, having his Father’s name written in their foreheads.

Note: The Father has a “name” that will be in the memory/minds of his students thus the Father has a physical body upon Their joint return.

Joh 14:21 He that hath my commandments, and keepeth them, he it is that loveth me: and he that loveth me shall be loved of my Father, and I will love him, and will manifest myself to him.
Joh 14:22 Judas saith unto him, not Iscariot, Lord, how is it that thou wilt manifest thyself unto us, and not unto the world?

Note: Interesting that here Judas is indicating that Jesus had before that indicated the “humans in the world” would NOT see him:

Joh 14:19 Yet a little while, and the world seeth me no more; but ye see me: because I live, ye shall live also.

Note: Thus Judas will see him because Judas SHALL Live. And remember Jesus said God was god of the living not the dead and the living were all those who had received a seed that they can grow through looking to their Older Member into eternal Life. But it doesn’t seem likley that Jesus was speaking of eternal life for Judas yet, that is as an absolute to be given, because Judas would still have a great deal of proving his love for the Next Level through his Older Members after Jesus has his vehicle killed and then upon overcoming the world upon Jesus return incarnate.

Joh 14:23 Jesus answered and said (unto) him, If (a) man ((G5100 tis= ONE)) love me, (he) (will) keep my words: and my Father (will) love him, and (we) (will) come unto him, and make (our) abode ((G3438 mone= a staying or dwelling)) with him.

Note: Even though “we” was added by the original translators it seems contextually justified in this case as the disciples already knew Jesus was saying he was coming back and they would see him and and be with him in his kingdom, so since the Father is being depicted as also loving each of the students as after all the Father is the one who gave these Souls to Jesus to teach/lead/birth.

Luke 9:26 for whosoever (shall) (be) ashamed (of) me and (of) my words, (of) him shall (the) son (of) man (be) ashamed, when (he) (shall) come ((g2064 erchomai= accompany, appear, bring)) in ((g1722 en= with/by, altogether)) (his) own glory ((g1391 doxa= very apparant (exposed/obvious to sight), showing thinking, opinion, judgment, viewpoint)), and (in) (his) father’s, and (of) (the) holy angels ((g0032 aggelos= messenger)).

Note: He’s saying when he comes in his own very apparant, obvious to sight way, his “father” would also be apparant and those called the holy angels the disciples who gave their life for Jesus.

There are a number of additional indicators that the Father and Jesus are both to come incarnate.

TI EXITS FIRST

For Ti, it was when she left her vehicle (body) on June 19, 1985 as prophesied to occur before Do in:

Rev 12:16 And the earth helped the woman, and the earth ((1093=ground)) opened her ((846 autos= it’s)) mouth ((4750= by implication because of related language (thoughts/words)*)) and swallowed up** the flood which the dragon cast out of his mouth.

* Do said after Ti exited that her vehicle was burnt out, referring to her taking the brunt of the negative thoughts of those humans in the world that hated them that the Luciferian “beast” motivated, (flood which the dragon cast out of his/their mouth). Understandibly most humans who had loved ones in the group would lament their loved one’s leaving their lives and them behind, though if they sought solice from God, however they thought of God, they would have found peace of mind with the same way anyone who loses a loved one, which is inevitable for all humans eventually and often seemingly before their time will be faced with. For most it would be a great challenge to be at peace with a loved one’s decision to follow a different path. Ti and Do told us, those we left behind would receive special help because of our choices to leave to give ourselves to the Kingdom of God/Heaven exclusively but it still depends on each individual to choose to seek that help and let themselves find that peace and even spur their own closer relationship with the Kingdom of God/Heaven, the ultimate highest purpose a human can live for.

**This phrase “earth opened her mouth and swallowed up” has some history. Note in the song sung by Crosby Stills and Nash about those who fell demonstrating for peace at Kent State in Ohio on May 4, 1970 when the national guard shot randomly into the students who were peacefully protesting Nixon’s escalation of the Vietnam war by a major bombing campaign against Cambodia. Sawyer went to school with the brother of Jeffery Miller, one of the killed students when this occurred. This song was about the “cost of freedom”, in this case the freedom to demonstrate against a government that justified murder for profit. Thus these gave their lives and it was an instrumental event that helped change public opinion against the war and eventually brought down the Nixon administration. The lyrics “mother earth shall swallow you, lay your body down”.

Pertinent verses:

Psalms 57:3 He shall send from heaven, and save me from the reproach of him that would swallow me up. Selah. God shall send forth his mercy and his truth.
Psalms 124:3 Then they had swallowed us up quick, when their wrath was kindled against us:
Numbers 16:30 But if the LORD make a new thing, and the earth open her mouth, and swallow them up, with all that appertain unto them, and they go down quick into the pit; then ye shall understand that these men have provoked the LORD.

I say it was prophesied as Ti’s exit before Do and the student body (her seed) because of the next verse:

Rev 12:17 And the dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant ((3062 loipoy= remaining ones)) of her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ.

Her seed includes her “son” whom she gives birth to in:

Rev 12:2 And she being with child cried, travailing in birth, and pained to be delivered ((5088 tikto= bring forth)).
Rev 12:5 And she brought forth a man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron: and her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne.

Some Christians think this chapter is talking about Mary the human woman who birthed the baby vehicle named Jesus. This is very far off the mark because Mary was at best a disciple and a disciple can’t give what is a “spirit birth” to their teacher. Only the parent, here in the context of one’s heavenly Father can bear their young by a “spirit/mind birth”, Just as Jesus said he would do with his diciples in the new age upon his/their return. Also, these prophecies were given to apply to the future, not to tell stories about the past. These prophecies were also given to pertain to the time of Jesus and his Father’s return, so all those preachers who conjure up all the history related to what these verses depict are simply missing the point of their purpose and application. Of course they couldn’t have done any better until Jesus came and revealed the only correct interpretation which is being revealed now because Ti and Do were that return so their story does that revealing to those that know what they taught and did over their 12 and 24 years incarnate and try to match it up with these prophecies. It would have been better for those Christians who wanted to understand the book of revelations to use it as clues of what the return would look like and keep it to themselves instead of then teaching their ideas to others so that others then think they understand them and can’t imagine the real deal when They come. However, this is allowed by the Kingdom of God/Heaven so that all have their choices and for those the Kingdom of God/heaven prepares, will not be satisfied with certain answers until they make sense with the entire picture.

DO AND CREW EXIT LAST:

For Do and Their Crew, their student body, the returned Saints/Angels, Jesus forcasted would return with him and his Father, their ascension was when they layed down their vehicles lives over March 21-23, 1997 which was broadcast as the “Heaven’s Gate cult suicides”.

ABOUT HOW THE STUDENT BODY ARE WITH THEM:

First of all this was never just about the Two Witnesses. The entire reason Jesus and His Father were returning was to birth their litter of Souls. Thus it can be assumed wherever these Two go, their litter will also be, physically with them, that is for the FIRST fruit Souls and for the LAST fruit Souls mentally with them until the close of the 2nd harvest phase/self judgement period that seems to be finalized by Ti and Do and Crew’s final return, but NOT incarnate this time, but only visible in the sky/heavens this time.

Pertinent verses that depict presense of the student body and their qualifications and conquering to be harvested FIRST fruit (despite what many Chritians think they would be First, while they will in fact be potentially LAST) that Jesus prophesied in:

Matthew 16:27 For the Son of man shall come in the glory of his Father with his angels; and then he shall reward every man according to his works.

Note: Jesus says He as the “Son of man” shall come. Son of man is the same as “offspring of human”, that’s incarnate.

Rev 6:2 And I saw, and behold a white horse: and he that sat on him had a bow ((those who have entered into covenant with the One sitting on the white horse (AppleWhite was the name of Do’s “horse”))); and a crown ((Ti births him to his task on the Throne, Fatherhood as he then brings the student body through the birth canal without Ti’s incarnate presence)) was given unto him: and he went forth conquering ((is conquering as he helps each student to conquer)), and to conquer ((to complete the task, having overcome the Luciferian space alien fallen angel attacks)).

Rev 11:2 But the court which is without the temple leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and two months ((two meanings for greek “men” = one as a month as in moon cycle and the other as referring to those whe are “assured/sure” which makes more sense following context of referring to those on “foot”, another depiction of having a physical body and occupying the holy city)).

Rev 11:16 And the four and twenty elders ((There were ~25 left from the first “thunder” by Ti and Do in 1975/76 harvest)), which sat ((depicting student setting)) before God ((One on the Throne, that Ti birthed Do to take upon her incarnation exit in 1985)) on their seats ((exit video shows the white seats the student sat in)), fell upon their faces*, and worshipped ((served and are serving now to locatge those who want to be “saved” as the second harvest (belief and service in Ti and Do are the requirements to qualify))) God,

Rev 14:4 These are they which were not defiled with women; for they are virgins. ((like jesus said even lust in mind was defiling and also said, they would no longer marry at this time to become “angels”)). These are they which follow the Lamb whithersoever he goeth ((the student body are literally with him 24/7)). These were redeemed from among men, being the firstfruits ((saints (those who gave their lives for God), Jesus disciples)) unto God (Father=Ti) and to the Lamb ((Son=was Jesus,now Do))

Pertinent verses that indicate TWO phases to the return with the One who was incarnate as Jesus, as One of the Two Witnesses being First (incarnate) and Last “in his glory/brightness” (visible in the literal heaven’s/sky) WITH his HOLY(pure) angels (crewmembers, those who graduated and were born into new physical bodies):

Rev 22:13 I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end, the first and the last.

Matthew 25:31 When the Son of man shall come in his glory, and all the holy angels ((saints)) with him, then shall he sit upon the throne of his glory:

Pertinent verses that are depicting the Luciferian fallen angel space aliens as the Devil and his angels:

Mat 25:41 Then shall he say also unto them on the left hand, Depart from me, ye cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and his angels:

HOW DID THEY LEAVE:

Each of the Two Witnesses, Ti and Do, as I see it and each of their graduating students ascended when their Soul bodies left their “borrowed” human containers (human bodies), when they decided to exit by “giving their life” (in the case of Ti, having taken the brunt of the negativity *1), in the case of the 39 by, “falling upon their faces”*2, aka “the greatest love”*3, aka “laying down their lives*4” over March 21,22,23 of 1997.

*1 Rev 12:16 And the earth helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth, and swallowed up the flood which the dragon cast out of his mouth.
*2 read caution below first
*3 read caution below first
*4 read caution below first

CAUTION – THIS THINKING IS NOT TO SUGGEST ANYTHING BEYOND WHAT IT MEANS TO THOSE WHO CAN RELATE TO IT AS THE UNVARNISHED TRUTH. Becoming a member of the Kingdom of God/Heaven is a huge task and the hardest task a human can engage and takes many lesson opportunities to build to. Just because we all look the same and generally have the same likes and dislikes, doesn’t mean we are all in the same Next Level determined, “grade in school”. It’s impossible for any human to judge what grade in school anyone else is in. That’s why Jesus said, “Judge not” in terms of measureing self and/or others in this regard.

BEFORE PROCEEDING ONE MIGHT WANT TO READ THIS PERSONAL NOTE FROM SAWYER:

PERSONAL NOTE FROM SAWYER:

“I was a fully dedicated student of Ti and Do’s for 19 years. I was assigned tasks to help Do with fellow students who were having problems, in which I reported to Do directly about. I sought to give my life. I was prepared to lay down my life with them before I left as we had been directly confronting the idea for years before they ended up proceeding. But still, I was not fully recognizing the reality of the Next Level. I was still thinking about the Next Level and my own participation in a spiritual way that showed I still have my “self” in mind, which needs to be erased and converted to be on firm footing. Jesus called that “denying of self” – which is giving one’s will to ones Older Member. Because this flaw in my complete overcoming of humanness became evident, I was tested and I flunked the test. Ti, while outside her vehicle, as she Exited years before, but I knew it was from Ti, opened a gate that allowed a Luciferian space alien fallen angel to influence me to give in to sexuality and I immedieally caved by allowing images in my head, although I had for 18 years before then been quite good (I thought) at self control over my thoughts and had had no self stimulating of myself to give into sexuality before then. And from that day on, it seemed impossible to control and I tried to hide it, which was another falling. I went before my fellow students and exposed my actions but I still could not seem to muster even the desire to restart my self control. So approximately nine months after falling, Do was going to reassign me to the Overseer tasks I had become accustomed to performing for Do but I realized I was too much a hypocrit so for the first time told Do I couldn’t accept the assignment, to which he said, “Then what do you want to do”, to which I said, “I guess I have to leave”, to which he then said, “you want to become more objective”. Do then asked to speak to a fellow classmate, Nrrody to relay to the other students in the crew where I was staying at the time “not to try to talk swyody out of leaving as he knows what he is doing”. I was asked where I wanted to go and I said, “nowhere, just give me a bicycle and I’ll start riding it east”. As we were in California at the time. Do did not agree and suggested staying with former members who still wanted to be in touch with the group but were living in Arizona to which I agreed.

I was given $600.00 in cash and a plane ticket and a few changes of clothing and was on the plane the next day. I couldn’t stay with the former members long as I wanted to re-engage my human styled life and although they were living a full human styled life, we were not compatible in that, so I got a job and a apartment and bicycle and some musical instruments I used to play before joining. It was over ten year later that I realized why I had left them. I had never once disbelieved in Ti and Do and when I reengaged with my vehicle’s family, all the relatives were puzzeled that as they saw it, “I got out of the cult” but didn’t see it that way. Then after I started a relationship with a woman and she became pregnant, when the group layed down their lives, even though I still did not want to think of myself as one of their members, I felt compelled to go public to tell what I knew of them as the media didn’t know what to make of any of it and painted these wonderful people as evil or misled by evil, which I knew had zero foundation. So after doings lots of media all over NYC til the 60 minutes show on Easter Sunday of 1997, I went back to my life and helped birth my daughter by a midwife in our home in Carmel, NY and began to have dreams that I was observing the group and in a very, very gradual way over several years til the 9-11 attack that I had premonitions about the night before, “I wonder if we are going to be bombed?”. That was a shocker as I was just 30 miles from ground zero and knew people that worked in the towers that for strange reasons didn’t go to work that day. In any case, I had more and more dreams and eventually wanted to be in Do’s service again but didn’t want to leave my “wife” and daughter and felt that wasn’t an issue now. It took me many years to be able to re-digest this Next Level thinking so I know how hard it is and how it’s bizarre and nearly impossible to consider as reality, but it is reality so I must. However, at one point I asked Do in my privacy if I needed to prepare to lay down my body as they did. He came to me in a dream as clear as if I was sitting right next to him and said to me, “you need to give your life”. This is the way of the Next Level. They always give us options but it is a training program we are working up to completing. Ti and Do called it at one point, “God’s Astronaut Training Program”. Thus I am attempting to “give my life” and am willing to give it by telling about my experiences far and wide and accepting the negative backlash that may in fact eventually require my physical life. I do not look forward to that time but can’t think of a better way to go than being in service to my Heavenly Fathers, Do and Ti.”

*2 Rev 11:16 And the four and twenty elders, which sat before God on their seats, fell upon their faces, and worshipped God,

*3 greatest love – giving/laying down one’s life for one’s Older Member, Disciples for Jesus, Jesus for his Father, Disciples for brethern

Joh 13:33 Little children, yet a little while I am with you. Ye shall seek me: and as I said unto the Jews, Whither I go, ye cannot come; so now I say to you.
Joh 13:34 A new commandment I give unto you, That ye love one another; as I have loved you, that ye also love one another.
Joh 13:35 By this shall all men know that ye are my disciples, if ye have love one to another.
Joh 13:36 Simon Peter said unto him, Lord, whither goest thou? Jesus answered him, Whither I go, thou canst not follow me now; but thou shalt follow me afterwards.
Joh 13:37 Peter said unto him, Lord, why cannot I follow thee now? I will lay down my life for thy sake.
Joh 13:38 Jesus answered him, Wilt thou lay down thy life for my sake? Verily, verily, I say unto thee, The cock shall not crow, till thou hast denied me thrice.

Joh 15:12 This is my commandment, That ye love one another, as I have loved you.
Joh 15:13 Greater love hath no man than this, that a man lay down his life for his friends.
Joh 15:14 Ye are my friends, if ye do whatsoever I command you.
Joh 15:15 Henceforth I call you not servants; for the servant knoweth not what his lord doeth: but I have called you friends; for all things that I have heard of my Father I have made known unto you.
Joh 15:16 Ye have not chosen me, but I have chosen you, and ordained you, that ye should go and bring forth fruit, and that your fruit should remain: that whatsoever ye shall ask of the Father in my name, he may give it you.

*4 giving one’s life for the sheep, laying down one’s life on instruction from the Father

Joh 10:11 I am the good shepherd: the good shepherd giveth his life for the sheep.
Joh 10:12 But he that is an hireling, and not the shepherd, whose own the sheep are not, seeth the wolf coming, and leaveth the sheep, and fleeth: and the wolf catcheth them, and scattereth the sheep.
Joh 10:13 The hireling fleeth, because he is an hireling, and careth not for the sheep.
Joh 10:14 I am the good shepherd, and know my sheep, and am known of mine.
Joh 10:15 As the Father knoweth me, even so know I the Father: and I lay down my life for the sheep.
Joh 10:16 And other sheep I have, which are not of this fold: them also I must bring, and they shall hear my voice; and there shall be one fold, and one shepherd.
Joh 10:17 Therefore doth my Father love me, because I lay down my life, that I might take it again.
Joh 10:18 No man taketh it from me, but I lay it down of myself. I have power to lay it down, and I have power to take it again. This commandment have I received of my Father.

b) At or after their ascension into heaven how did the people of the earth take notice?

Thus they ascended after they “separated by death” from their vehicles that was seen by the world on most every news website, television and radio news broadcast and many documentaries thereafter, moreorless saturating the news cycles for weeks and then still very prominant for months to follow. It was taken out of the daily reporting by CNN and others when Princess Diana died in an automobile crash that was considered to be foul play, which was in August 1997. This was also when the highly contraversial Hale Bopp comet made perihelion – and was visible to the naked eye in North America. A number of documentaries were made, the last of which was by the National Geographics channel, Season 3, Episode Two entitled, “Final Report: Heaven’s Gate”, first broadcast on October 17, 2008. This is one of the most popular television publishers in the world, so this would have been seen by even billions potentially and suggests strongly in the most direct manner I have seen that Ti and Do and crew could have been the “Second Coming” so I tend to consider it the first phase of the Seventh angel’s sounding (trumpet blast) as it occurred 7 years after the 9/11/2001 shaking up, literally and figurativly speaking, as all prophecy seems to encompass:

Rev 11:13 And the same hour was there a great earthquake ((4578 seismos= to throw humans into a tremor of fear or concern)), and the tenth part of the city fell, and in the earthquake were slain of men seven thousand: and the remnant were affrighted, and gave glory to the God of heaven.

Below are the prophecies with more detailed literal revealing of intent that show, first the overview in Rev 11:7, how it is through the Luciferian fallen angel space aliens through human authorities and their media mouthpieces that the Two are subued. It doesn’t stop them but for the moment but not until They had accomplished the portion of their “testimony” they needed to accomplish to have gathered their “lost sheep”, the Souls who came back with them to prepare human containers (how they see human bodies) to receive their more evolved Minds, to take them over (overcome their humanness under the direction of these Two) for their graduation aka their Spirit, but actually Soul births, aka being harvested as fruit from the garden to become Members of the Evolutionary Level Above Human where upon arrival (ascension) will receive new Next Level styled physical bodies:

Rev 11:7 And when they shall have finished ((performed, execute)) their testimony ((Rev 10 seven thunders – public disseminations of their information)), the beast ((Luciferian fallen angel space aliens through the human authorities through the mouthpiece of the media)) that ascendeth ((climbed)) out of the bottomless pit ((hiding place/prison inside the Earth)) shall make war ((battle)) against them, and shall overcome ((3528 nikao=subdue (“shot down by the press”)) them, and kill ((615 apokteino= seperate(apo) by death (kteino))) them ((auto= themselves – their choices when and how to exit though by non-supernatural means, with Ti exiting first by “burning out her vehicle as depicted in Rev 12:16*1)).

*1 Rev 12:16 And the earth helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth, and swallowed up the flood which the dragon cast out of his mouth.
Rev 12:17 And the dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ.

Rev 11:11 And after three days and an half the spirit of life from God entered into them, and they stood upon their feet; and great fear fell upon them which saw them.

Rev 11:12 And they heard a great voice from heaven saying unto them, Come up hither. And they ascended up to heaven in a cloud; and their enemies beheld them.

It was world news every day until the Princess Diana death took over the news headlines and continued for many months afterwards with virtually every news agency in many countries around the world, every magazine, etc. which was the 7th Thunder of Rev 10 all during the 6th angel’s “trumpet like” sounding. Thus the whole world was watching in amazement what was bizarre. Psychologist tried to come up with reasons and of course they always do but when it comes right down to the details, they had virtually none to support their theories, though they certainly wouldn’t admit to that. I helped several of the most popular researchers. The last national/international “observation” of these Two was by:

National Geographics Channel’s Season 3, Episode Two entitled, “Final Report: Heaven’s Gate”, first broadcast on October 17, 2008. This is one of the most popular television publishers in the world, so this would have been seen by many millions potentially and suggests strongly that Ti and Do and crew could have been the “second coming of Jesus”. I know as I was one of their primary sources and asked that in exchange for my interview they at least make that statement, though they didn’t substantiate it with all the data that suggests it. I am barely touching on the proves here but one has to focus on ALL Jesus said, not just the miricles and “love of one’s neighbor” aspects and some of the parables and the distortion of what he meant literally morphed into figuratives like the “camel through the eye of the needle” example. It was virtually impossible for a rich human to go to the Kingdom of/in the heavens because they will be putting their trust in those riches instead of their Father in the literal heavens. The brainwashing of the populus is huge so that IT all looks normal and even progressive when it’s mostly way off the track it could be on. In that verse about the “eye of the needle”, the Greek word was a sewing needle however sized the eye and NOT an archway in the town that camels had to stoop on their knees to get through with a load. However, I would not be surprised if Jesus said it that way to give the option for people to believe what they wanted. Otherwise why would he have used the camel example with a sewing needle. Jesus was very clearly speaking to at least two mindsets, those that could grasp what he was teaching because they were invisibly and genetically prepared to receive it and those that could become first time believers and finally those that would find fault with everything he said and would try to get rid of him. He didn’t want to be “done in” before he had finished his task of bringing those his Father gave him far enough along so that they could graduate their “second trimester” towards their eventual “spirit/soul birth” that jesus said they would need to take a new flesh body (water birth) to accomplish upon his return.

So all their enemies were watching alright.

enemies = 2190 echthros {ech-thros’} from a primary echtho (to hate); hateful (passively, odious, or actively, hostile);

They were/are all those who hate them, whoever they are and for whatever reasons, most without a cause except how it threatens their agenda as was the case with Jesus as well. He was killed by the fearful Roman government at the behest and pressure from those with the most power over the common people, the high priests of the establishment Jewish religion who feared loss of their congregations. They were simply pawns of the discarnate Luciferian space alien fallen angels who later commondeered Paul of Tarsus to their agenda to dilute and bring distortion to what Jesus taught. He was a pawn as well. That’s not to say he didn’t become a believer to some degree, though it went to his head big time so much so that today much of the modern Chrisitan organizations are nearly void of talking and teaching all Jesus said as Paul made it palatable to the masses, programming them to believe that all they need to do is believe on Jesus and accept their illusion of who he was into their hearts and they would be “born again” to receipt of eternal life with him either when they die or by some physical rapture into the clouds.

What has become talk of rapture, originally meant being “caught” away from their life, Jesus illustration of what he and his disciples were doing when they passed on the truth that the Kingdom of God/Heaven was “at hand” as “fishers of men” the application of which was made manifest when someone met up with the incarnate member in some shape or form and “left all behind” to be with that Older Member and/or to go about disseminating Their “words” aka Holy Mind/Spirit. Yes, believers who make those connections with the current Older Member(s), in the current case in the names and teachings of Ti and Do, when they die in Their service then their Soul body will also be caught away from it’s otherwise destination somewhere in the spirit world and will be taken to be on board a hovering but invisible to humans spacecraft “heaven” that is among the skies, in the atmosphere of Earth, thus among the clouds. It is true that those who “died in christ” 2000 years ago, being those who gave their lives in service to the Father and Jesus person and teachings, the true “Saints” would “rise first”, (as Paul wrote in 2nd Thessalonians), rise being to “stand up again”, the definition of “resurrection” which pertains to standing on physical human legs, (born again of flesh, aka in carnal – latin for flesh). These became the firstfruits. They didn’t need any proof at all to recognize their shepherds as the physical human vehicles they would take were also specifically prepared from their birth to be open to the receipt of the information that would register to them as totally true (because it is). And so it is with those who “remain”, have not died in Christ yet. These have also been prepared from their birth of their physical human bodies. For these though Ti and Do’s arrival and departure may still have very challenging aspects to embrace fully, they will still have a degree of recognition that They ARE who They said They ARE, so can choose to follow that belief to further waking up to as with each baby step we take towards Ti and Do, by talking to Them, they help us by revealing more of Themselves to us in ways that always leave us the choice to deny or doubt is occurring. When we push past the doubts and fears, asking Them for the strength to do so, they provide it and such we as the human plants that we are begin to push out of the dirt/ground/earth towards the sun’s light to eventually grow by that faith into a fruitful tree.

Rev 11:12 And they heard a great voice from heaven saying unto them, Come up hither. And they ascended up to heaven in a cloud; and their enemies beheld them.

The “great voice from heaven (the sky/outer space, among the cloudiness)” was Ti’s spacecraft that was cloaked/disguised (clouded) by the “Hale Bopp comet”. Do recognized Ti’s “voice” (Holy Mind) in that Comet’s arrival as what they (He and Ti) had anticipated from their awakening as punctuated by comet Kohoutek, the first ALERT EXCLAMATION (WOE) that followed the 5th angel’s sounding/voice (trumpet blast, vibrational uplift of the human mindset of the 1940’s-50’s when they arrived and simultaneously opened up the prison gate on the underground Luciferian fallen angel space aliens so they could freely choose to influence humans to their agenda that gave the humans the opportunity to raise their awareness of their reality so they could be more equipt to accept what Ti and Do would begin to teach when they began their prophecy fulfillment period that served to call the first fruits to their classroom, that took shape in 7 distinct passes (thunders), the first of which in April of 1975 in Los Angeles and the 7th in two phases, the first of which was the Heaven’s Gate Web Site and Book in 1996 and the 2nd phase their actual exit that was broadcast for every eye to see and for every ear to hear over the entire world. It’s the choice of humans to pay attention, to as Jesus said OBSERVE THE SIGNS and not assume they would be the first to SEE while not paying hardly any attention to the news or to what’s happening in the literal heavens/outer space) and the massive consciousness uplifts in considering the myrid of evidence of Space Aliens among us. That Seventh Thunder dig shake the human kingdom and especially in the Temple and Court areas of the planet.

As was said in the Heaven’s gate web site that remains today, Hale Bopp was the “sign” that told them it was time to exit. By that point they had already ruled out all exit scenerios that were considered by Ti and Do and some students from before Ti exited in 1985. Even so they “covered their bets” a common Ti and Do expression along with, “if in doubt don’t” along with “take a chance on a positive” along with “change is the name of the game” along with “get your Mind in your vehicle” which was synonymous with “clean your house” or “wash your robe” that Jesus was quoted to have talked about. On that last one, that was Ti talking to the returned saintly Souls; who had filled their soul container with a significant portion of Their Next Level “Holy/pure” Mind/Spirit while with Jesus until they gave their physical vehicle’s life in the process of their service, stimulating their press INTO their current human vehicle, prepared to receive that Holy Mind/Spirt.

I may be wrong about this but thus far it seems that the Second woe BEGAN with the arrival of the Hale Bopp Comet with the evidences (many) of it’s “companion object” that was covered up by NASA and Art Bell’s radio show where it was first spoken of and the Hawaii Observatory who allegedly airbrushed and/or explained away to cover up what was clearly photographed by the Japanese as an object that was not the comet and not a star and showed a photographic signature that showed no time lapse that distant objects (stars) show. Also it was reported that a number of amateur astronomers could see the companion with their telescopes and even binoculars. Yet the crew of Do and the 38 of the student body (with 4 to join them thereafter) which makes the 42 in Rev 11:2 referenced by the English word “month” which has two translations, as:

Rev 11:2 But the court which is without the temple leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty (and) two months* ((and/or surely)).

*3376 men mane a primary word; a month:–month.

OR

*3375 men mane a stronger form of men – men 3303; a particle of affirmation (only with 2229); assuredly:–+ surely.

The context is speaking about the Gentiles, those not prepared for the Two Witnesses arrival who live in the geographical area of the new nation Jesus said the Kingdom of God/Heaven would be given to, not in the plan for the Two Witnesses primary prophecy period. (Ti and Do always said they felt the area of the U.S. west of the Mississippi River was where they felt was in their range, though they did on a number of occasions venture east of the Mississippi River).

Thus the second part of this verse is speaking to the definition of the Greek “pateo” to “tread under foot”. Here is the Strongs definition:

3961 pateo pat-eh’-o
from a derivative probably of paiw – paio 3817 (meaning a “path”); to trample (literally or figuratively):–tread (down, under foot).

One can see this is speaking about a “path” that is walked upon in relationship with the Holy City. A city by definition is a walled/defined area where PEOPLE live. A path doesn’t exist without people to trek upon it both literally and figuratively. Thus this is talking about people who are on this path in a the “temple/altar” streets(paths) of the city in which they are learning what that “path” entails. In this case the city is “holy” which is a reference to Beings who inhabit it. Holy means that which is “pure” and this is by the standard of the Next Level, thus this is the literal physical geographic area being shown John where all those who are Pure or in a stage of purity (measured by one’s Older Member’s purity) are on foot within. This is given to us by words, Mind/spirit, so it’s spiritual in that sense but the manifestation of all this “spirit/mind/words” is through physical human beings. Thus this verse is also depicting what Jesus said was a “standing up again” (resurrection) in (carnal/flesh) upon his return. Speaking of purity (holiness) has to do with the application of the behavior and ways of the Next Level as demonstrated and directed (birthed) through Older Members incarnate in human vehicles example, (The Two Witnesses) relative to each students capacity and “grade in school” as they approach their graduation/birth/harvest and metamorphosis into membership in the Next Level. Therefore these spoken of are COMMITTED which is the reference to the “bow” in Rev 6:2 – the “litter” of Souls being born who have covenanted to follow the lead of their Older Members.

Rev 6:2 And I saw, and behold a white horse: and he that sat on him had a bow; and a crown was given unto him: and he went forth conquering, and to conquer.

Here is where the ONE sitting on the white horse (applewhite) is crowned, which has to do with being graduated to His new station spoken of as the throne:

Rev 12:5 And she brought forth a man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron: and her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne.

The ONE who is doing the birthing is depicted here:

Rev 12:1 And there appeared a great wonder in heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars:
Rev 12:2 And she being with child cried, travailing in birth, and pained to be delivered.

The sun is not only a depiction of the Great Light source, light in ALL ways that SHE has wrapped around her (clothed with), but also represents the Father while the moon, as a tool and reflector of the suns light being her vehicle, the female mother.

Ti always told Do she was to “get him started” and after that said she would “go back”. When she said this Do always wondered what that meant as Ti didn’t give any further details. He couldn’t imagine that she meant she would be going back to her human vehicle’s family. When her vehicle expired by becoming overcome with what the doctors called cancer, that Do said was the response of the vehicle to Ti’s Mind that “burned out her vehicle”, he knew what she meant. She came with him to birth him to his next station of bringing the students through their birth canal/metamorphosis, which is what the Rev 6:2 reference to “bow” really depicts, not what many Christians say it means as a bow as in bow and arrow, a human weapon of war. The Next Level has no need to use human weapons though they allow humans to do some of the house cleaning of weeds (tares) in their choice of waring.

bow = 5115 toxon tox’-on
from the base of tiktw – tikto 5088; a bow (apparently as the simplest fabric):–bow.
5088 tikto tik’-to
a strengthened form of a primary teko tek’-o (which is used only as alternate in certain tenses); to produce (from seed, as a mother, a plant, the earth, etc.), literally or figuratively:–bear, be born, bring forth, be delivered, be in travail.

This Rev 6:2 verse is the only place in the New Testament where the Greek “toxon” is referenced and defining it as a simple fabric doesn’t provide any hints to it’s application, though interestingly “bow” is used througout the Old Testament and New but with sevreal different origins and defintions anywhere from “bowing” as in bowing down to the bow and arrow but mostly to mean “covenant” and a cutting which makes the most sense in this context as “conquering” is aka Overcoming and Prevailing against one’s advasary (satan). Do said the definition of Isreal really meant an “overcomer”. Jacob was named “Israel” after he wrestled with an angel and won. The Hebrew word Israel means, “prevail as Jehovah” which can equally be conquer or overcome as Jehovah thus in this One sitting on the white horse of Rev 6:2 bow does seem to relate to this One’s efforts to conquer not only for himself but for each of those he is midwifing through the soul birth canal which thereby makes a great deal of sense that He is then “bearing” young himself.

This means that this Rev 6:2* rider of the white horse, having conquered takes place BEFORE the next one sitting on the Red horse.** I suspected early on that the Red horse was Bush and company, the Red republican “ruddy” (english) war mongering (red) who in one way or another stimulated the hatred that resulted in the NYC world trade center and pentagon attack as it brought “endless war” (on terror) thus no enemy to ever conquer as was hoped for by the committee formed in 1997 who were called, “progress for a new american century” writing the document “rebuilding American’s defenses” in which they said they NEEDED an event like Pearl Harbor to provide the impetus to bolster the U.S. to be able to fight a two front war. This was signed by Rumsfelt and Wolfowitz was one of the main authors of this document and Cheney was instrumental as well. Thus the 9/11 attack became that “pearl harbor” like event and that led quickly to a two front war against Afganistan and Iraq that are still in shambles while wealth is being generated by both, part of the reasons for the attacks in NYC’s financial center in the first place.

*White horse
Rev 6:1 And I saw when the Lamb* opened one of the seals, and I heard, as it were the noise of thunder, one of the four beasts saying, Come and see.
Rev 6:2 And I saw, and behold a white horse: and he that sat on him had a bow; and a crown was given unto him: and he went forth conquering, and to conquer.

*Lamb = for those who say the Lamb couldn’t have opened the seal and also be the One riding the white horse, they are not understanding the Next Level ways. The Lamb is referring to the Older Member from the Kingdom of God/Heaven (heavenly Father to us) who served in the task of “laying down his life for his sheep” thus termed the Lamb. It’s not the vehicle named Jesus that is opening the seal. He took that vehicle with him into the spacecraft cloaked by the clouds to demonstrate to his disciples that he was from the Kingdom of God/Heaven as he said only those who came from the Kingdom of God/Heaven ascend with their physical body back into the Kingdom. But once on the spacecraft he would get back his “celestial” model physical body to wear until he needed to return to operate as one of the Two witnesses. Thus this usage of “Lamb” was to make that link.

**Red horse:
Rev 6:3 And when he had opened the second seal, I heard the second beast say, Come and see.
Rev 6:4 And there went out another horse that was red: and power* was given to him that sat thereon to take peace from the earth, and that they should kill one another: and there was given unto him a great sword ((military might)).

*Ti and Do said that the U.S. area was kept from having major calamities so the classroom could function freely but Do said towards the last days that that protection would be lifted when they were gone and it didn’t take long, did it.

While talking about it, it was days before election day between Barak Obama and McCain/Palin and I was wondering who to vote for (but it was between Obama and Ralph Nader in my mind). I had a dream of Dstody, the only black male vehicle of the 38 who laid down their lives and also his vehicle was the brother of Lt. Ohura of Star Trek fame. He came to me and all he said with a thought was “Obama”. So I thought Do sent me the answer and I voted for Obama. However, weeks later at most, I came upon:

Rev 6:5 And when he had opened the third seal, I heard the third beast say, Come and see. And I beheld, and lo a black horse; and he that sat on him had a pair of balances in his hand.
Rev 6:6 And I heard a voice in the midst of the four beasts say, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny; and see thou hurt not the oil and the wine.

Note the references to money in relationship to commodities and the balancing act he would have to perform that he entered office with the intense challenge of in a global wide financial “crisis” we are still in the midst of.

Therefore I knew that Dstody’s message probably had nothing to do with who I might vote for but everything to do with making sure I knew that Obama was the physical manifestation of the prophecy to have a black skinned human in the presidency fufilling that prophecy. (This does not mean Bush or Obama have a relationship with the Next Level but it does show that the White horse by it’s timing alone is the vehicle that Do took to perform his “conquering task”.

But referring to that “litter”, each of these students needed to do their own overcoming/conquering, thus the reason conquer was repeated as Do was not only conquering the human kingdom and his assigned advasary (satan), Lucifer but was also the direction behind each students personal success in conquering each of their assigned advasaries (satans).

These same students as Souls in human vehicles with Moses and then with Jesus made “covenant” each time to abide by the instructions, behaviors and ways as provided by the incarnate Older Member they were with for each stage (trimester) in their progression to “birth” into full adult membership in The Kingdom of Gods from/in the literal heavens. Ti and Do more accurately, “plainly and boldy”, as prophesied, spoke of the Kingdom of God, Kingdom of Heaven as “The Evolutionary Level Above Human”, where evolution is NOT Darwinian but represents the fact that life on Earth was built in kingdom levels; Mineral, Plant, Animal and Human so that the human kingdom could become the footstool for deposited Souls, as Jesus spoke of, as seeds, aka in Ti and Do’s real analogy as a catapillar’s cocoon to build one’s crysalis (christening = making one’s eye single to yield one’s whole body full of light) within to emerge a butterfly with “wings”, a Jesus and Old Testament reference to the way an eagle (the greatest of birds) takes one on their back/wings to the hightest places.

6) In the hour after they ascended, in what city did the great earthquake occur that killed 7000 people? A tenth of that city was to have been destroyed.

I believe this was New York City and was the World Trade Center attack and collapse of the two towers, etc. that “shook” the entire Earth in more ways than one and ushered in “endless war” as I just outlined of the Rev 6 Red Horse, Bush and company. Humans actually recorded a seismic frequency generated from those two towers collapsing in the way they did.

Here is how I justify this opinion:

You are referring to:

Rev 11:13 And the same hour*1 was there a great earthquake*2 ((shaking, tempest, commotion)), and the tenth part*3 of the city fell, and in the earthquake* were slain of men seven thousand: and the remnant were affrighted, and gave glory to the God of heaven.

*1 hours
First off this “hour” doesn’t show a relationship to incarnate beings and being so small is likely a reference to a small amount of time but by Next Level definition of small. As it was said in scripture that a day to the Next Level was as 1000 human years, an hour of Next Level time would boil down to about 40 human years. Thus since they exited in 1997 the earthquake which is actually more accurately a “shaking, tempest, commotion” during that same ~40 year period.

*2earthquake = 4578 seismos {sice-mos’} from 4579; TDNT – 7:196,1014; n m AV – earthquake 13, tempest 1; 14
1) a shaking, a commotion 2) a tempest 3) an earthquake

*3 tenth part of the city fell
“city fell” is quite the indicator.

tenth part = 1182 dekatos dek’-at-os ordinal from deka – deka 1176; tenth:–tenth.
1176 deka dek’-ah a primary number; ten:–(eight-)een, ten.

In actuality, however this came to be, I don’t know, because the Next Level didn’t orchestrate this attack. If they want to weed the garden they use weather systems not humans with bombs, etc. However, the buildings that fell during the attack and fell because of the attack or were demolished completely because of the attack actually are 10 as follows:

World Trade Center buildings 1 – 7
St Nicholas collapsed completely
Deuche bank was so damaged it was later fully demolished
Fiterman hall of Manhattan Community College was badly damaged and because of mold is being rebuilt.

Curiously there were 17 buildings listed as part of the complex, all of which were either collapsed or damaged by the two towers falling. I only bring this up because of the translation above of “tenth part” as being “(eight-)een” which I do not understand how that relates exactly yet.

However, 7000 people didn’t die in the attacks, but it is odd that the Next Level would forecast an exact number as they would not know that as the garden is designed with the possibilities for random deaths though to those that ask for help in certain circumstances they will step in to save someone.

But in researching this number, it seems cilioi comes from chilioi and chilioi is of an uncertain affinity thus leaving some question as to it’s meaning:

thousand = 5505 chilias khil-ee-as’ from cilioi – chilioi 5507; one thousand (“chiliad”):–thousand.
5507 chilioi khil’-ee-oy plural of uncertain affinity; a thousand:–thousand

Nevertheless, in the Old Testament the term used for thousands

According to Easton’s Bible Dictionary certain instances translated to “thousands” is actually referring to “families”* or “tribes”. If this was actually more accurate it would make more sense that the Next Level knew that 7 families of humans would be represented in those buildings. The restaurant at the top of WTC 1 was called “top of the world” so one can imagine that there are 7 continents that were being represented here by WTC 1-7. This ties in potentially to the “family” translation.

*Thousands
(Micah 5:2), another name for “families” or “clans” (see Num.
1:16*; 10:4; Josh. 22:14, 21). Several “thousands” or “families”
made up a “tribe.”

*In this verse:
Num 1:16 These were the renowned of the congregation, princes of the tribes of their fathers, heads of thousands* ((family, tribe)) in Israel.

*504 ‘eleph eh’-lef
from ”alph’ (502); a family; also (from the sense of yoking or taming) an ox or cow:–family, kine, oxen.

To every event – angle sounding, woe, voice, thunder from the Next Level there are human events that are responses many both in ways seemingly negative and positive in terms of providing help to humans to rise out of their human condition which often takes the form of a trauma and loss. The Kingdom of God/Heaven designed the planet and they designed the kingdom levels of life to build on one another with the intention of providing a path to graduation from the human kingdom into their very ranks. Therefore, all creatures were designed with a limited life span. All life is a gift from the Next Level regardless for how long it lasts and what is experienced as it is only through living that a human can be given a soul/mind deposit from the Next Level that by the direction of the Older Members shows that new soul how to sprout into a prospective member of the Next Level. To foster this growth, Ti and Do said that “the human kingdom was not designed to work”, which is why it was spoken of as a footstool. The stool is for the human to use to reach up to the Next Level when the Next Level draws them. When humans experience trauma is shakes them from their security and mammalian self reliance, self being looking to themselves and/or their tribe or family, nation, etc. for help, so that they have the opportunity to reach up for help from the Kingdom of God/Heaven in whatever terms they came to understand Them. When humans reach up for help, the Next Level crews working under their Captain and Admiral Older Members offer appropriate help to those that ask according to their own guidelines. The Next level can take the spirit from a human vehicle that died and set it aside (save it, what Do called being “put on ice”. This means that spirit and/or soul will be given further opportunities to grow. That’s all, yet that is a lot as those that don’t ask for Their help are simply merged into the spirit world to be eventually recycled at the end of a garden cycle.

Inet Radio on Ti and Do’s fulfillment of the Two Witnesses Revelations 11 Prophecy and on Inet TV as well

January 13, 2014

I’m broadcasting tonight 9-11pm et on Inet radio and USstream TV focusing on the Two Witnesses of Rev 11 as a student wants me to prove how Ti and Do fulfilled all those prophecies. Can call into radio show at: 646-478-5618 to listen and/or talk or just go to the address to listen and log in to chat at: http://www.blogtalkradio.com/sawyer and to watch my funny face on TV go to: http://www.ustream.tv/channel/heaven-s-gate-cast

Q and A about how the group lived and ody’s and how sawyer met Ti and Do

January 11, 2014

I was asked the following questions by someone interested in making a movie so I’m simply sharing the answers:

1) I’ve heard that in Heaven’s Gate everything was done in a meticulous manner. So, I wanted to know was there a schedule for the day? For instance, did you all wake up, attend class, play games or do any other task or hobbies at a certain time?

Yes we lived very regimented lives, especially when we moved into houses from the wildeness camping we did for years. We had nearly 50 people living in one single family, but large house, that only had about a dozen beds so we had three shifts of sleeping and that included three shifts of breakfast, lunch, dinner, etc. A few years after that about half of us got jobs in the world and so schedules had to work around the job requirements. We had an “up time” and a “down time”, all terminology for otherwise normal human things changed. For instance all departments of life became “labs” so there was the nutri-lab for the kitchen and the fiber-lab for the laundry and the yeast lab for the bakery, etc. We did have games and a certain amount of TV and outings to movies and occasional restaurant or church visit. One year we had a Christmas tree and exchanged presents but all the presents were functional for the “craft”. We called the “house” a craft as it was a simulated spacecraft environment and organization. We eventually had computer networks and intercome and TV’s even in bathrooms so we could keep up with news and special shows Ti and Do wanted us to watch. It was literally amazing. Everything was clean and orderly and yet never any harsh words or threats, though challenges galore to come up to speed with Ti and Do’s directions for our thoughts and actions. We had virtually every kind of discipline one sees in the religions but without pompt and ceremony or garb or dogma. There was no group prayer or stock prayers, though we did have a few meditations. Things would be required for a time and then optional. We lived like kings and queens towards our last years in the sense of comfort and always had well prepared foods with health consciousness most always considered. We experimented with all sorts of fasts and diets for health to mitigate doctor needs. We did have a library and “played astrology” as a game for those that gravitated to doing so. All this and much more stimulated the “lessons” – how we worked with one another and the teachers.

2) When you join Heaven’s Gate was there some kind of initiation? Did Do call you in front of the class and announce the new member or something similar?

No, but you will see in question 4’s answer what took place.

3) Forgive me, if you’ve answered this already, but was the suffix “ody” something you earned? Did you have reach a certain level, complete a certain task, or demonstrate a certain amount of competence to earn the suffix?

Here is a thorough understanding of “ody”:
http://wp.me/puJOl-2M

4) Can you describe the first time you met Ti & Do? What was your first impression?

You motivated me to do something I’ve been meaning to do for a while. I’ve posted the first six chapters of my autobiography I wrote long ago. In it you will find in the last two chapters answers to these questions:

http://wp.me/puJOl-83

Sawyer’s Story:”Raptured” by the REV 11 TWO WITNESSES-Bo (Do(Jesus)) and Peep(Ti(Father))’s “Second Coming”

January 11, 2014

Chapter 1 – History prior to meeting Ti and Do

Our lives don’t really begin at birth. We are but a continuation of the life that is the continuation of life that is the continuation of life to the beginning of our species. So much of who we are is therefore shaped before our birth, then further sculpted by our parents, their characteristics, beliefs, habits, education, methods, principles, standards, ethics, morals, even their aspirations as well as their accepted limitations, bias, prejudice, jealousies, envies, angers and any number of other challenging components.

Some of these influences whether internal or externally fortified don’t surface as our characteristics until we are under the same stresses of life, often occurring at a time period comparable to when our parents experienced the same. For instance certain of us never experience conservatism until we have children and desire for their well being, forms of security and a healthy/happy future. Other influences on us never sit well with us and in these cases become points of; repulsion and/or rebellion. Our development is further complicated by the vast environmental influences we are raised into, such as the social, economic and political atmospheres prevalent during our formative years. These in total are the influences that form a new being, one that could be potentially wiser, the same or more limited than all who came before them. In either case, here is a synopsis of my journey through early development. I have not done an exhaustive research of my ancestry.

GENETIC HERITAGE

My grandparents were immigrants to the United States. On my dad’s side both of his parents, Fred and Mary were of Czech Bohemian decent though they were born in Manhattan. On my mother’s side, my grandmother, Rose was born in Austria, having her family in Vienna. I don’t know a lot of her youth except that she came from a large family of 10 siblings and at some point she went to work in a convent in Vienna, as an aspiring nun. However, she met an Austrian man, John, who she eventually married. My grandfather, previous to meeting my grandmother was enlisted into the Austrian/German army during WWI. He was critically wounded and taken for dead. As the story goes, he had received wounds to his abdomen area. They tied a coat around his midsection to hold in his organs and he was taken for dead and thrown on a truck. But it was discovered that he was still alive, so was cared for and survived. Meanwhile my grandmother, Rose followed one of her older sisters to the United States. John soon followed after Rose having started a relationship with Rose just before. They soon married. John’s war wounds left him with a half of a testicle. That didn’t keep him from impregnating my grandmother with their only child, to become my mother. They lived in Manhattan and went through the depression. John had opened a pet shop at some point but then lost his store. However, he kept many of his pets, a good many birds and hung up the cages in their small apartment. He traded or sold them for food. At some point they were trying to qualify for welfare and they were told they had too many birds so would not qualify, presuming they could sell the birds. I can recall clearly when we’d visit them in that Manhattan apartment, all the bird cages crowding the small kitchen. I have little memory of my mother’s dad, except that he would take me to the city fountains in the summer to play and cool off. He got sick and died when I was five years old. I can see him in bed. He left me one thing he was fond of, a harmonica. I later became a proficient professional quality player. My grandfather also avoided doctors and would do his own health research.

My dad, also named Fredrick began dating my mom, Violet soon after his return from US Army service in WWII. He served in both theatres. I always wondered why war was presented as a play or movie. Perhaps that was my first question the first of many to come as I slid my way out of that birth canal. He, as so many others had an extremely traumatic experience with the war that would stay with him for the rest of his life. I didn’t learn to what extent until I was in my 40’s. His buddy had his head shot off while right next to him. He was a sergeant and piloted a tank. He was a good driver so became useful transporting ammunition by truck across the alps on dirt roads. At the time many of the trucks were in poor service. He often drove with no brakes in the mountains, at night during blackouts, when no lights were allowed to be used, fearing being shot at by fighter jets. My dad, who has since passed was regularity plagued by nightmares of his war experience. He would get out of bed and hold onto the side frantically, while shouting with great alarm. He was a kind hearted, hard working, fun loving guy. When I became a teenager I put him through a great deal of stress, being a rebellious youth. I hope I can do as well as he with my kids. Anyway, they hit it off and married.

BORN IN MANHATTAN

I was born in Manhattan, that’s “dirty New York City” as my mom and dad would joke as we drove in to visit grandma and grandpa. It was in the summer of 1951, sometime in the early morning when I popped my head out to take a look. My first stab at life was to shoot back following the doctor’s slap on my rump. I peed in his face. At four my parents bought a house on Long Island, a suburban town. It was a middle class white Catholic neighborhood then but soon became mixed with those of a Jewish faith. It cost them $10,000 and I later learned that was a year’s salary for my dad at that time. He worked as a salesman for a commercial refrigeration equipment company. He was generally good at whatever he tackled be it carpentry, plumbing, car mechanics or sports. In later years he took additional part time work to make ends meet and try to get ahead. It was 1952 and except for these suburban housing developments, our town was still largely potato farms. I can recall going to church, having been raised a Catholic, in a barn with roosters running about. There was always a bunch of days each summer that climbed near or slightly above 100 degrees, so hot and humid it was that I at times would faint in church service from heat exhaustion. I can recall then and some years later, passing out only to awaken to the face of a nun in those black habits. I always felt I was bad to have fainted though I don’t recall having reason to feel that way, except when you come to and a nun in that black hood and white habit is sternly even angrily admonishing me for passing gas… I mean out. I should have passed gas…hmmm just wondered…maybe that’s why she was angry?

I was a small skinny kid, light brown hair, freckles and bad breath yet a normal kid I suppose. I did well in elementary school, though was certainly insecure. I can recall screaming for my momma not to leave on the first day in Kindergarten. My mother told me that one of the first things I said that they took special note of was a question, perhaps at five about where babies come from which they didn’t know how to answer. In response to their lack of answer I said in a matter of fact way…”Well, things don’t just happen!”

SAID I WANTED TO BECOME A PRIEST

I was perhaps 9, about 1960 when I remember saying I wanted to be a priest. I had no interest in being an alter boy and have mostly bad memories of being Catholic. My best memories are going to church in a barn with roosters running around, with big fans installed inside for the hot weather. I recall passing out in church on 2-3 occasions, I think due to the heat. My system passes out easily. Maybe it’s an oxygen thing. I can recall on all three coming to lying on my back in between the seats or later the pews when they finally got a church built and seeing a nun with the black hood and white habit trying to rouse me and to be honest felt like I was being scolded.

I can recall at about 10 years old when my folks were about to leave me for two weeks at a Catholic Boys Camp, St. Dom Bosco, I cried and cried not to be left there by my parents. Maybe it was in part because I was a small boy and was picked on somewhat and especially by my friend who was a year younger but much larger who also went to the camp. I learned to run fast. That saved me at times. At others, my older cousin, also at the camp would protect me from him. I remember one thing I liked about camp. I sort of liked the singing we’d do in church everyday. I remember being bashful at first, but the brothers and nuns sang too and that was neat. One thing I hated was all the aggressive behaviors of the other kids. For instance at chow times, they might put out a plate of chicken per table. If you were not fast and aggressive you often did not get any chicken. But I never starved. Another thing I hated was the swimming lessons. Why couldn’t we just swim and have fun. No, we had to learn to tread water for three minutes and being skinny I was always cold in this upstate NY lake. I frequently was shivering and had blue lips. I just did not thrive on competition though in years later I played all the street sports well, even better than many of the bigger kids. I was fast and could catch anything that came my way, be it a baseball, basketball or football. And I had a good arm too. I could hit well and my dad taught me lots. I ended up pitching in Little League, but that was after several boring years as an outfielder who struck out a lot. It seems in life I have always been a late starter and frustrated by it but once I got the hang of something, I tended to excel. I also had a mischievous streak, though may have been taught that by an older friend who I grew up with that in later years I did some mischievous things with on his instigation. But he wasn’t at this camp so I certainly had my own boyhood cruelty. I recall crushing frogs with rocks. I confess, that was the extent of my cruelty to anything living, except for the times I would pull the legs off beetles and other insects and put them in arenas to battle with one another. I wonder if I imagined that they actually fought one another. Maybe they thought the other took their leg off. Who knows what karma I created there. Oh, yes, I would step on yellow jackets bees with my bare foot to kill them. If you did it with your heal real hard it worked well, though I got my share of stings at other times when I wasn’t trying to kill them. It was just something we boys did to show our machismo, something I had little of.

I loved watching the TV show, The Big Picture, essentially black and white war footage in documentary form. It was exciting to see those battle ships shooting off those big guns and all the GI’s running about. War was a theatre indeed; I also liked playing cowboys and Indians with my six shooters in hand. Yes, I was a cowboy – the Indians were the savages right? I don’t know when I reversed that understanding of reality. Zorro was a favorite hero and of course Jesse James and there were these two out of time outer space characters, Bleep and Blip or something like that, animations that would zip through space on adventures. That was more or less my first exposure to anything outer space, though a few years later there would appear the TV shows the Outer Limits, the twilight Zone and eventually; the Jetsons.

FLYING DREAMS

I remember a dream I often had. I was playing basketball and when I’d jump, like to do a layup, though it seemed in this dream I did jumping all over the court and when I’d do it, I’d be trying to stay up – in other words not come back down to my feet – yes…fly or glide. It took practice and in the first couple dreams I barely stayed up – long enough to reach the basket, though I never stuffed it or shot it in the dream. The technique I used to stay up was one of mind. It was like I was creating a pressure with my thoughts that was reaching upward to pull my body along. Maybe a year into these dreams I did glide quiet a bit and even remember soring like super man, not all over the world and stuff but all around the court. I’d be swooping down close to the floor and then exercise my mind to pull my body up, sometimes grazing the floor. I got quite good at it and it certainly was fun though at the same time it felt difficult to do. It never happened without that pulling effort that seemed to have to be primed anew with each episode. These dreams seemed to linger even after I awoke and I could go back into them. Years later I was told flying in dreams was a good sign. It meant your spirit was, as they say “astral traveling”. I registered that as…oh, I guess then I’m somewhat advanced in some way but never paid it any mind thereafter. I guess I could have tried to do it more and perhaps I would have traveled all over the world astral traveling as is told of yogi’s and such in India have experienced for thousands of years.

ADOLESENCE

But reeking of being a late starter. I can recall being ashamed of my body early on, like in 5th and 6th grade and thereafter. I learned early on that I was not well endowed as they say and to top it off was slow to puberty often marked by hair growth on the body. I remember wishing I’d had some facial hair and then was stressed about how hairless my legs were. I was a dirty blond hair color. I remember using my mom’s mascara to paint the few blondish hairs I had on my mustache. I’m sure I looked great in school. I’d wipe it off before I came home. Once I forgot and my mom wondered what was on my face. I learned early on that if I was going to fit in, at least as I felt I wanted/needed to, I’d have to hide it from my mom, I don’t know about my dad in this respect because she had her ideas about how I should look and act. I to some degree are the same with my daughter. You don’t want to stand out as weird or poor or lacking self respect. For instance, in 6th grade I was into the Four Seasons singing group. You know, “Sher er er er er er eri bay ay beeeee, Sheri Baby” The “in” look at the time was tight black polyester pants that came up a bit on the ankle where they were tightest. Then we’d wear white socks and if we could get them, pointy black shoes with one inch wooden heals. It was later called the greaser look as opposed to the collegiate look of penny loafers and corduroy which my mom seemed to prefer. I remember putting taps on my shoes to sound real cool walking down the hall of the school. Of course I thought I had to hide those shoes from my mom so I’d leave them at school when I had a locker in 7th grade. My mom also had a favorite hairdo for me. She would take me to the barber who would put that gunk in my hair, that stunk like glue and in fact was as it set up my hair, making it stiff. I didn’t like it but it was the way it was. The part I hated more was the way she and the barber would comb my hair with this high wave right in front. I felt so square with that “doo”. So what did I do? I’d go to school looking like that and go to the boys room and with some additional gunk and a brush, unheard of for boys to use, I’d slick back both sides of my hair and pull a little wave down in front, you know the Elvis Presley look.

In was just about this time I can recall my first introductions to manhood. I didn’t like that either. It was 6th grade when I became aware of the birds and the bees as they called it. My parents didn’t tell me anything I recall. It was my friends that whispered this and that. I recall getting “excited” in the locker room showers. I was not attracted to boys. It just happened and as I was virtually hairless and small, I hid and skipped the showers thereafter. So I hated Gym for that reason in addition to the fact that I was near the smallest guy in my grade. For some reason, no one even considered a small kid could ever play basketball or football and I was at that time not one to rock the boat of pier pressures.

BEGAN MUSIC

One thing I did excel in was playing hand drums on my desk. The song Wipe Out was a favorite because of it’s drum beat. I wanted to take up drums when an instrument was offered, but they said they already had a drummer or two so my choices were band instruments. I got clarinet and early on thought it was square. Where I got some of these ideas of what was square, I don’t know.

REPEATED ABSTRACT NIGHTMARES

I can recall two additional phobias of sorts that plagued me in about my 12th year or so. I would frequently wake up screaming bloody murder and I mean screaming bloody murder and it would go on and on. My parent were beside themselves with it. I recall why. I would be laying down, say on my stomach with my hand under my face on the pillow and that pillow would feel like it was growing huge like a house and then becoming normal or small again. It was well beyond reality and it was while awake too that it would continue. I was afraid to go to sleep for this reason.

At times it was during a period of high fever but then occurred at other times as well. The other thing was being spooked by the dark and especially in my room where a closet was frequently left open and it had hats on the top shelf and long overcoats hanging so looked like a person was there. I would hide under the covers. I’d wake up an stare at the shadows near ready to swear someone was there.

It reminds me, how my daughter of 9 is afraid to go to sleep and is afraid of the dark and of any loud noises and of any hint of even playful rabble rousing between people. Like if I started playing with my partner, tickling or something or with my older stepdaughter in a rollicking way she would freak out and scream like we were murdering one another. She got a double dose of types of sensitivity or over active imagination some might call it – others a type of intuitiveness or antenna as to things that we can’t readily see happening around us at times and/or a type of genetic memory of past experiences perhaps. I don’t actually believe in past lives though at that time I thought it made sense. Not that I don’t believe in the existence of spirit…I do, but it seems it is created by our mind, a combination of life experiences and genetic inclination and application.

My first real bad impression of Catholics was when I was to be “confirmed” into the religion. To be confirmed I had to pass this fifty question test. It was mostly memory questions, like: Where is God, the answer to which was: God is Everywhere. Well, I couldn’t pass the test and don’t recall what questions I got wrong, but do recall myself with Mother Superior and my mother at the Catholic school where I had my religion classes once a week drilling me on these questions in a last ditch effort to get me to pass. I did not and the nun was angry with me, that was clear to the point that I did some crying. I guess I was what some might call a cry baby at times. I don’t know that I ever passed the test but I was confirmed. My mother gave me the confirmation name of Scott, named after Scott Carpenter the second American to orbit the earth and the fourth American in space. Do you think that had something to do with being interested in space or why I became a space case?

I recall in some later years when at these evening Catholic adolescent meetings I felt like I excelled at their religious curriculum when it had less to do with memory of some Apostles creed or some such thing. But I also skipped the meetings and went to shoot pool instead.

MOVIES ABOUT HEROS IN WAR OR FOR GOD MADE BIG IMPRESSIONS

And from who knows what age, but certainly in early teens I was repeatedly watching the movies… The Ten Commandments, The Greatest Story Ever Told, which was about Jesus, Gunga Din – that was set in India and had one particular spot where an Englishman took a bad whipping yet did not complain or let it stop him from his just mission. That seemed heroic to me. Another movie that made a big impression on me was Spartacus set in the time of Christ, as there was a scene in it of Jesus carrying the cross to his execution. I would get very emotional whenever I’d see Jesus suffering or anyone suffering for what appeared to be for no good reason. Spartacus ends with the “good guys” as it was portrayed, though are rebels to the mainstream roman army, perhaps 300 of them are captured by the Romans. They had them all lined up and the Roman leader asked who was Spartacus, the name of their leader. There was a long pause and a then one man steps forward and says, “it is I”, then another and another and another until all 300 stepped forward and were all hung on trees sort of the way Jesus was hung. It seemed so damn brave and honorable to have that kind of commitment.

I recall thinking…wow, I want to be a hero or martyr like that. I didn’t exactly have those words form in my mind. I remember thinking being a hero or martyr, dying for another or for God, though I had no idea what God really was but that this was the noblest of lives we could live. I just felt a yearning to be that. I guess it was like my 9 year old daughter who at 4 or 5 would say… “daddy…I want be her” when she’d see someone glamorous or a good cheerleader or something. But I was not in reality all that brave. I was in fact very protective of myself – didn’t generally take big risks like other kids.

When I finally got into 7th and 8th grade, my grades started going downhill. I recall laying in my upper bunk bed at home and trying to make myself do the solo man sex thing, well you know and I just couldn’t get it to happen and I was quite frustrated by it. I was very shy, had very few school friends and did not excel in anything in particular.

At about this time, I’d joined the PBC which stood for Police Boys Club. It was a Navy formatted boys club. We wore Navy uniforms and my dad and other dads and an occasional older kid were the officers. We’d march and learn to handle a rifle in a ceremonial way. I remember one time while we were at an outing in New London, Connecticut on the Naval base there staying for the night. We were all going to bunk down in bunk beds on the base and the commanding officer of our group said good night and I replied “Guten Nacht” – German for good night. Silence. The next morning I had KP duty. The real sailors there thought it was quite funny. I was a bit of a joker but it was natural for me to speak some German as my grandmother taught me some as she was from Austria and spoke German. After KP duty we put on a drill team performance for the cadets stationed there. I was small so I was on the last row of the drill team marching in full blues. The command was “double to the rear, harch” as they would say which meant for the entire platoon to reverse direction at the same time and then reverse it again to continue marching in the original direction. I failed to do the second reversal so I was marching in the opposite direction from the rest of the platoon. I guess that sums up the story of my life in some ways. I just couldn’t get with the stream. My grandmother used to call me “wrong way Peabody” named after that cartoon character who drove airplanes and cars and such while sitting backwards. I got better at drilling though and ended up training younger cadets, but the highlight for me of the entire experience was when they started a drum core. I got a snare and I immediately took to it like a duck to water. And with it they gave us a rank to go with our experience, so overnight I went from a seaman first class to a first class petti officer and then I got to order younger cadets around, though I never gravitated to doing so.

ENTRY TO “DELINQUENT” BEHAVIORS

By the 9th grade I began smoking cigarettes, naturally on the sly. My parents had both quit smoking a few years earlier, a good move, but I recall being sent to the store to buy my mom cigarettes. I don’t know who first introduced them to me. Perhaps when I began babysitting for a smoker’s family, I got a hold of some cigarettes. I was quite the sneak back then. While baby sitting after the kids went to sleep I’d find the cigarettes and use a razor blade to slice the bottom of the package to get some out and tape it back with see through tape. I bet he discovered it though I never found out. I had a bunch of baby sitter episodes the most memorable being on a New Years Eve – I was drinking Jack Daniels that I found in the house. I must have been 16 or so. They had this ham they were going to bake the next morning for New Years Eve dinner. I remember chopping at it with a knife, not in a killing way, but just in a goofy way and putting cigarettes out on it and stupid stuff. I never baby sat after that…I wonder why.

It was about this time that my dad arranged for me to work my first job, putting newspapers together in a drug store on weekends. I recall seeing all the things in the back rooms and couldn’t help but take things. I would take prophylactics, not that I had any use for them, and I began taking cigarettes. In fact it became a big problem because I began taking cartons, sometimes two or three a night. I would take them to school and sell them out of my locker. With the money, I’d treat my friends to billiards at a local parlor. I eventually lost my job and my dad confronted me about it and I denied it. I lied. I did a great deal of lying. I’m not proud of it. I got another job through my job and stole little worthless things. I also would steal cookies and candies and stuff out of supermarkets. In high school I stole change from the school store where I was trusted to work. I’d then go to the soda shop down the street, often cutting class to play pinball with the money. When I got away with it, I couldn’t hold myself back and would steal more and more. I eventually lost that job too. I was a petty thief and a liar to not get caught. I never made up a lie maliciously, like to get my way or to manipulate another, but to defend myself and what I wanted to do, I’d lie and lie and lie even in the face of obvious evidence of my indiscretion. My younger sister of five years once caught me smoking in the back yard of our house and I denied it up and down. This sort of came to a head when I was in a department store record department. I loved music and did not have any budget for albums so I took a shopping bag and helped myself to some 30 albums. This was my most blatant robbery. Usually I was somewhat cautious about where, when and how I stole but this time I through all caution to the wind and tried to walk out the door. I was nabbed and taken to a back room and interrogated. For sometime I refused to give them my name, but eventually cracked and my mother came down to get me. I was let go with a warning. I guess I was lucky. After that I seemed to cease my thievery so it goes to show once a thief not always a thief and that the punishment does not always have to be harsh. I was grounded but that was no big deal as I’d just climb out of my window and back in before anyone knew I was gone. Yes, I was quite defiant of the rules whether they were just or not. I wanted to do what I wanted to do and did not take well to being told I couldn’t do it.

Now in high school with bad grades and no popularity and a girl friend that would not “put out” despite my advances, I was certainly a mixed up kid. I recall playing with my girlfriend – you know kid playing where I was trying to cop a feel and she would fight me off. I eventually got stronger than her and one time tackled her and got on top of her and was going to do what I wanted to her, which amounted to getting that first “feel” I so desperately wanted. She pleaded for me not to and I ceased and let her go. I recall a couple years later when I had gone to college and she and I had long since ended our on and off again relationship, I was fooling around with her on the doorstep of her parents house. She had had another boyfriend by then. She put her hand down my pants and determined the size to be laughable. I left her embarrassed. By that time I had had many make out sessions with various girls but nothing ever got more sexual and it was a big hang-up for me – a great source of frustration.

EXPOSURE TO RECREATIONAL DRUGS AND EXPLODING COUNTERCULTURE

In my junior year a friend, Mike turned me on to “drugs” for the first time. I don’t recall any big program to try to steer kids away from experimenting with such as they have now. It was 1968. I smoked some marijuana and liked it though I didn’t experience much. Mike’s friend Mark became my friend as well. Mark was a senior and after school his parents house became a haven for all manner of drug use, barring anything hard core like heroin or needles. There was none of that. There was plenty of hallucinogens though and I became a regular weekend tripper and a full time stoner. We began dealing to support our own growing habits and for the first time I had a click to fit into. I didn’t try the pot to get into the click. I tried it because it was offered me and I was into trying whatever was offered me. There were four of us. We were heavy into all the heaviest rock music of the late 60’s – Led Zeppelin and Pink Floyd, who at the time I felt was “evil” music, especially while “high”. We regularly attended shows of Procol Haram, The Beach Boys, Hot Tuna, Ten Years After and such. One time we went to a show and sat with the bass player from Iron Butterfly. He showed us how to roll a joint with one hand. The show opened with The Chambers Brothers playing, Time, then came Janis Joplin and Big Brother and the Holding Company and the headliner was The Jimi Hendrix Experience. Of course we love the Cream and especially the drummer Ginger Baker, a speed freak kind of a guy.

INTRODUCTION TO THE NEW AGE

We would drop acid, LSD or mescaline and go to a park nearby to hang out, listen to musicians and play Frisbee. Simultaneous with such considered to be mind enhancing drugs, as I never gravitated to depressants like heroin or opium, I began exploring religion/spirituality, perhaps stimulated some by Mark. I had always been a Jesus enthusiast, though had no interest in Catholicism. Mark was raised a Jew, but we would read our bibles together and go to the park barefoot with our bibles and hang out with older “hippies” some of whom were anti-war activists. We also read books like “The Tibetan Book of the Dead, Kahil Gibran’s, The Prophet, Johnathan Livingstone Seagull, essentially about reincarnation and many other “new age” materials that were becoming prominent in the United States at that time. We attended an introductory meeting in Manhattan given by the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s Transcendental Meditation Organization. A requirement for membership was quitting pot which by then was not my desire. I smoked pot and hashish like a pack a day cigarette smoker.

One time Mark came to me with a vivid dream he’d just had. He said in the dream, I, speaking of me, was one of the Apostles of Christ. He wasn’t referring to himself in that vein, just me. I found it appealing to be considered such but that’s about as far as it went.

I ASKED GOD TO BE “TAKEN”

In one of our ventures to this park, the Planting Fields arboretum we did our drugs and drove over there. Just as we were getting “off” we came upon a side area in the park where someone had created three symbols using twigs and leaves. They were the peace sign, the cross and the Jewish star all in a circle next to one another. When I saw them together, I was so impressed that they were together, I fell to my knees paying homage to that demonstration of great unity. I had a slight hallucination or dream perhaps. I saw the sky/heavens open with great light descending and it was as if I saw God. A few minutes passed and I turned to look behind me where Mark and Brad had been and all I saw were their bibles blowing in the wind. I assumed God took them and left me. I was freaked by it and fell to my knees again crying and asking God why I was not worthy. I got up and walked on, falling down every so often with grief. I was not so “out there” that I didn’t know my actions. In most of my “trips” I maintained control. I allowed myself to dramatize more than I normally would have when off drugs. I kept walking on and then saw them in the distance. I approached them and they were talking with a guy who was a year their senior. He explained that he had just come from Chicago where there were riots and he got beat up a bit. I looked at his face and could have sworn his entire face was constructed of scars, but I believe this was the drugs affect on me. However, drugs or not, this remained in my consciousness as a spiritual awakening of sorts.

FACED WITH THE VIETNAM WAR

Mark in particular was about to be drafted and his parents had hired a good lawyer to get him a deferment. I was against the Vietnam war, having had some exposure to the anti-war message and the political-economic real reasons for the war. There was no way I was going to fight in this war. I began considering fleeing to Canada. A year or so later the lottery system would be instigated by President Nixon and my birthday yielded 343 of 365, so the likelihood of my ever being called was remote.

NO INTEREST IN THE EDUCATIONS SYSTEMS

I barely graduated high school because by then I was a regular cutter of classes. I hated the subject matter, did not wish to study, was not involved with any school activities, was hanging out with other more or less hippies smoking pot regularly and tripping. But a deal was made and I graduated and my parents found a obscure college that would take me. I went away to Beckley College in Beckley, West Virginia. Until then I was still under my parents thumb. They would not permit me to grow my hair long which I resented but now that I was living at school, I did as I wanted and grew my hair and whatever beard I could. But college was a joke. I became the hippy I wanted to be. I did plenty of drugs. I was exposed to heroin but turned it down. During the course of all of my drug usage, with the hallucinogens I often hated that I took them. The beginning of a trip was physically very stressful, like being plugged into a wall socket. After that it was interesting, though still somewhat traumatic. But I continued in that vein in College.

VIOLENCE IN WEST VIRGINIA

West Virginia at that time was certainly not a peaceful place for hippy’s. I and some of my friends were threatened by locals and police, some were punched around a bit. A policeman shot my friends dog. A truck tried to run us off the highway once. I walked into a general store where they also had a beer bar and one of the beer drinkers, turned toward me and gave me the finger out of the blue with a mean angry look on his face. I never did learn why. It was just one of a number of hateful things I experienced at that time. Another time, I had just taken some mescaline and was lying in the bunk above my friends waiting to “get off” and the owner of that bunk in our dorm came in and violently grabbed me by the lapels and dragged me out of his bed. He among most others in that dorm house were football players and were big. He could have whipped me good. He didn’t. I would have just got off his bed. I guess I shouldn’t have been there. In this first year of college I was still sexually starved. There was one hippy girl I hung out with but I was not attracted to her much so we never hit it off. I bring this up again only because I ended up buying all manner of naked girl pictures and pinning them all over the wall adjacent my upper bunk in my dorm room. Nothing was considered “hard” porn but for that day and age was certainly risqué. On the week of final exams I dropped acid so didn’t pass even one exam. One close friend had his brother killed in the Kent State action. He was from Long Island. Out of anger, I can recall talking and thinking about bombing something, though we had no bombs or guns or any inclination towards violence.

COLLEGE MADE ME A HIPPIE

When I returned from college my parents freaked at my long hair and disheveled look and I suppose bad grades and thus wasted money. I recall my mom and dad on top of me screaming, with my mother pulling at my hair and my dad punching me in the arm. It was traumatic but not very physically abusive. My dad was a strong well build man and could have knocked my block off with one punch. My mom did almost all the physical punishment which mostly amounted to chasing after me with a wooden cooking spoon. She’d swat me with it and usually I’d block it. She broke it on me once. One time my dad was so upset with me, perhaps because I came home obviously on drugs, though to them it wasn’t that distinguishable, but this time he took me into the basement. He took a hammer and handed it to me. I took it and he told me to come at him to fight him. He wanted to level the field and have an excuse to really knock my lights out. I through the hammer away and took off saying he was crazy.

My parents were in no way bad parents. In fact I think they were unusually well intended but they had no idea how to raise the likes of me. It was an era of kids more or less being seen but not heard. Kids were not treated with much respect. They were loved but not counted as people yet. My parents were taught the ideology of “spare the rod spoil the child” the “Christian” way. I can recall in parochial school they at times took the paddle to a kid and some teachers had paddles and other physical forms of inflicting pain. It was still a norm, at least in the Catholic school back then. The problem was that this generation was experiencing something new as each does and the old methods don’t necessarily work for the better. In evolution all things need to evolve, peoples thoughts, actions and methods.

ENTRANCE TO THE WORK A DAY WORLD

So I was back from my “failed” college experience, working in factories, warehouses and such jobs while living with my folks and continuing drug use and whatever partying I could find in my home town. I learned that some of my boyhood friends had also proceeded with their lives. Artie, a year older than I had gone to college in Monticello, NY. I never learned how involved he might have been in the antiwar efforts in Universities nationwide. He talked of bombs being constructed and of the blowing up of them in certain student buildings and other more militant antiwar efforts. I didn’t know how seriously he was involved but certainly did not condone such. My friend Mark had become a bigger dealer, having big blocks of hash. I felt nervous once when we asked me to transport it with him somewhere. Brad, a year younger was crazy. He had set fire to his parents house, so they were temporarily living in motel. Mark and I went there to see him and while there was a knock on the door. Brad opened it and a two guys came in and one put a gun to brads head. The other held a knife on me and Mark. They proceeded to locate Brads’ stash of a bag of pot and some money. Some years later when I came back to Long Island for a visit, having moved to Oregon, Brad came over and was really weird. He took my mothers carving knife and grabbed me and put it to my throat. I acted as if he was joking and he was, but one never knew with Brad. When we partied together, I would drop on tab of acid and mark a couple and he might drop 7 or 8. Upon return from college I recall going over to Jeff’s house in Levittown. He was a friend of Marks who I knew before I went to college. He had become a much bigger dealer now. We were at his parents house and he showed us the gun he needed to carry to meet his dealers. I was not at all comfortable with all the violence and it’s pretenses. I did not hang out with any of these anymore.

I recall walking the streets nightly feeling lost and lonely talking to myself. I’d go to the local Howard Johnsons to just hang out, then go over to shoot some pool and back home. I worked factory and warehouse jobs for that summer and my parents asked me to pay rent but also wanted me home by a decent hour nightly. I resented having to pay to stay at my own house and not have the freedom such payment should have afforded me.

MY FIRST REAL GIRLFRIEND AND SEXUALITY

That’s when I met my first real girlfriend, Tara. She was such a breath of fresh air. I met her at a party. I was very stoned and acting foolish but began talking about reincarnation which was of interest to her, though I could not really talk intelligently about it as for one I had no intelligence about it really. I began hanging out with her and her friends. She was fun and seemed to like me, so to impress her I challenged another guy friendly with her to a contest of who could quit smoking cigarettes. She did not smoke. I never smoked another cigarette. I just needed a reason to quit and having a girlfriend, not that she made that stipulation, was plenty reason for me. We did go on to become a number. I loved her, not only sexually but as a person. We dated for nearly a year in which time she bought me my first Conga drum. She was tired of my banging around on her legs, a hypersensitive response I had since grade school. I got good fast and played with other musicians in some bars and in drum jams. She was more of an antiwar activist than I so asked me to go to Washington with her to demonstrate against the Vietnam war, which we did. It was 1971. I can recall being herded out of Washington DC by national guard, though it was mostly peaceful. But there were all manner of weirdo’s at the demonstration. One guy grabbed Tara from behind with his arm around her neck and she was getting alarmed. He was a big guy so I began to dance with him and her until he relaxed his grip and we scooted away. He was probably really drugged.

STRANGE PREMONITION OF DANGER

Tara was not a drug user at all. She got me to quit the hallucinogens, though they were not a big part of my drug usage, however I was still a toker as they say. One evening she decided to smoke some pot with me. We were in her room in her parents house. Her parents allowed us our privacy there. She started to hallucinate on one puff. She was quite sensitive and had only tried pot one time before that. She saw Noah’s ark in detail and was sort of freaking out. I got scared not having experienced this kind of response from pot. For some reason we both were getting more and more paranoid, a normal pot experience as it makes you more sensitive to an altered consciousness that still feels real. I recall looking at the door to her room and feeling tremendous fear at what was on the other side. I was afraid of opening it. I thought evil was on the other side but I was not that stoned that I didn’t know it could have all been my/our illusion so I went to the door. Just as I got to the door and unlocked it, Cara, Tara’s younger sister who was 14 years old came bursting into the room screaming that some guy tried to pull her into a car as she walked around the peaceful upper middle class neighborhood. After that experience I swore off pot and at that point all drugs.

DESIRE FOR ADVENTURE – SUMMER HITCHIKING TRIP

That summer of 71 I got it in my head to go cross country. I’d been up to Montreal several times with friends and people I met up there said Vancouver was the place to go. That together with hearing stories of red neck Americans harassing traveling hippies, as portrayed in the movie Easy Rider I was more fearful to cross the United States so we chose Canada. We couldn’t afford a motorcycle so decided to do so by thumb. Our parents were not happy but knew they could not stop us. That summer, we hitched to Montreal, then to Vancouver, then down to Tijuana, Mexico and back by the same route. On the way out, I recall going through the plains of Canada and people were telling us that there were roving gangs looking to pick up hitchhikers and abuse them, so I bought a knife for protection, though I never for a moment thought I’d have to use it and thank God never did. I used it to cut fruit, veggies, cheese and bread our road staples. I wasn’t really that paranoid. It was just a precaution in a world of good and evil. One strange ride was with a couple who seemed like partiers. They would drive 100 mph but it was in the plains so not really dangerous, just reckless feeling. At a gas stop we used the rest room, they drove off with one of our backpacks. I think they were tired of us and didn’t know they had our pack and didn’t care. So we had to replace the pack and the expensive sleeping bag we lost.

At one point in the journey we decided to spring for a bus ticket through the Seattle, Washington area. While on the bus we met a guy who said he was a reverend for some religious group we’d never heard of. He offered to marry us right there on the bus. I didn’t want to. Tara was upset by this. I guess she wanted to get married or just wanted to know I would, I don’t know. She pressed me for why I didn’t want to get married then and there. The reason infuriated her. I told her that I’d want to tell my mother or allow my mother to be involved. Plus, to me this guy had no more authorization to marry someone than I did so it seemed silly. I didn’t really see any reason to marry. I loved her and intended to be with her for my life. Looking back, I definitely had a strong compulsion to not add great responsibility to my youth. I remember when Tara was late on her period one time before we left on this trek. I dealt with the possibility that she was pregnant. I definitely would have been there for her and the child. I even recall that she might have been open to considering abortion at that time and to me that was out of the question. In fact the idea that she could be pregnant so affected me, that we rarely had intercourse after that and if we did, she was on birth control pills and I still insisted on the withdrawal method of contraception as it seemed the biggest safeguard against an accident. Actually her taking birth control pills was not my choice. It was diagnosed by her doctor as the best medication to assist her with very extreme menstrual cramping. Each month she was in bed for 3-4 days with severe cramping, diarrhea, nausea and weakness. Nothing helped her but the birth control pills. I recall taking care of her each month when we lived in the wilderness cabin. She was not even capable of walking by herself to the outhouse.

THE REAL HIPPIE SCENE – SAN FRANCISCO

We got down to Berkley where we hooked up with that drug dealer, Jeff I knew on Long Island. This was a few years later and he was a lawyer but I learned quite a dealer as well. He bragged a lot. One night while there we learned of a Grateful Dead concert at the Fillmore West. We were avid Dead Heads in NY having been to a bunch of their dance marathon type concerts. We went and the opening act was Quicksilver Messenger Service. During the Dead show a girl was gang banged right in front of us. I never saw the girl until some guy dragged her out of the group. All I saw were guys emerging out of the group of guys surrounding her pulling up his trousers, saying, she’s liking it. I was disgusted by it – even sickened. We were hippy types but really more of the conservative ilk. We never had group sex and I remained off drugs entirely by then. That night we stayed in an old warehouse where I later learned was where Ken Kesey had participated in group hallucinating experiences. The next night we slept on the roof of the Berkeley free clinic. So we got our dose of the real hippy movement and were not really in sync with it except for the antiwar and music aspects. Then we headed down to Redondo Beach, south of LA to stay with another friend. It was hot and humid and the air was thick, thick, thick with smog. In fact I recall a helicopter coming overhead with a megaphone announcing for the suburban populous to stay indoors with their air conditioners on. It felt bizarre. We met up with other friends in San Diego did a quick visit to Tijuana and headed back home. I recall hitching through the apple orchards where a mass murdered had stashed bodies, near Chico, California and Redmond or so. I remember being harassed by guys in pickup trucks, threatening us. We were quite vulnerable. The police would occasionally tell us to move on and we’d have to walk out of the town limits. We spent many house hiking and waiting which is when I got a great deal of experience playing harmonica and beating the bongos I had tied to my 70 pound pack. I got some decent muscles from slinging that around for three months.

On the way back from this 10,000 miles hitch hiking trek, we got a ride in eastern British Columbia, from a guy with a suit. We drove through the night sharing driving and the next day stopped at a bank in Regina, Saskatchewan. He went in and came out about thirty minutes later. We drove to the next big city, Winnipeg, Manitoba. He did the same thing. As we got into Ontario and had driven though night two, he told us, he was a bank robber and showed us his gun under the seat. He didn’t steal by gunpoint. He acquired some payroll checks. He’d deposit them in one bank and withdraw the funds from the next. Then he asked us to take this rental car across the border into the states as he knew we were headed there. We declined sheepishly. I drove through the 3rd night with no sleep to arrive in the early morning in Montreal. We got out at a park and dragged ourselves to a tree and collapsed asleep for several hours. Who knows what ever became of him.

LIVING IN “SIN”

When we returned despite our parents objections we rented an apartment together. It was $200 a month. We both got jobs and decided that next spring we were going to move to Canada to try to homestead. I wrote away for topographical maps of British Columbia and decided where we wanted to look for land. Our apartment became a pretty busy place. We had old high school friends visit. I had more then than I had in High School. I was more into music then. I played some sax and drums and harmonica so our parties were loud. Two good friends, Mike and Jack had joined the Navy. When they were on leave or AWOL, they would come stay with us. There were many a weekend we would hitch to stay at their house as they lived off base. They were stationed in Newport, RI on the Intrepid. When we’d visit them, they always had wild parties but for some reason what I recall the most was listening to Credence Clearwater Revival, drinking beer as I was still off pot and reading the bible and trying to interpret line for line in practical terms. Jack must have thought me a nut case.

BOYHOOD FRIEND TELLS ME I HAD A BIG EGO AND THOUGHT I WAS JESUS

I remember my friend Artie, a long time friend who was of a Jewish background at one point told me he thought I had a big ego and that I thought I was Jesus. I thought nothing of the sort, though I had Jesus aspirations, though I did not know what they were. I remember thinking that Jesus was out of reach. How could someone have unconditional love for everyone, I thought. How could someone love someone who grossed them out for instance, or an enemy. I don’t know where Artie was coming from. The only thing I can think of is that my college experience gave me some identity and then finally having a full time girlfriend and living in my own apartment made me feel more grown up, so that did build some self confidence but how that came across to him in a negative sounding “ego” sense, I’ll perhaps never know. Perhaps the fact that he was then living at home and didn’t have a girlfriend and I guess I talked about Jesus some entered into it. It wasn’t like I was a Jesus freak and certainly was not evangelical or a preacher. I simply sought to understand what the historic person was about. I didn’t even think of him in a traditional Christian way of being the Son of God.

I was working on the other end of Long Island for a handyman. It was difficult work especially during winter. I would hitchhike to and from work daily and it was cold and dreaded but it paid the bills. Tara was working for her Uncle in Manhattan. She’d take our only car or the train. One day on the way to work, it was raining and she skidded off Northern State Parkway, a curvy road and totaled the back end into a tree. Fortunately she was not hurt at all. The car still ran but would not hold much gas and looked atrocious. I ended up ripping off the back and building it into a station wagon with a wood back made of salvaged materials. I put in a new gas tank and exhaust system. My dad taught me basic mechanics and I had a bunch of cars to practice on over the years. As the winter came I lost my handyman job and found one in a drug store. We had our beefs with our current apartment so moved out to Centerport. We got a big house on a pond. It was great but not without weirdness. Next door on the same property was the main house also rented out but to a group of college students who had wild sex escapades, or so I was told. We never attended, but it was not much of a secret. To afford the $300/mo. rent we rented out a room for $100/mo. to a x-rugby player from England.

MY FIRST JUGBAND

One of our regular activities at the house, on weekends was to have jug band parties. My friend Artie would come over with his friends Dave and Tim and sometimes there were others. We’d drink fruity brandies chased with Guinness Stout Irish beer and get drunk while playing washtub bass, washboard, spoons, harmonica, congas, bongos, dulcimer and jaw harp among other percussive instruments. I’m sure we sounded like hell but it was fun. We also enjoyed watching the community skate on the pond, literally outside our living room window. When we left, he was behind on rent by several months and left a big hole in the wall from his rough sex with his girlfriend that he did not tell us about until the landlord was coming to check the house. We lost our deposit due to him. However, I was wanting to get something from him. It just so happened his tires were the same size as our mustang tires and ours were bald and his were not. so I put his tires on my car and mine on his. His girlfriend found out about it and said he was after us. We left the house ahead of schedule and within a few days were on the road to Canada, this time not as a vacation but in search of a new life in a country with socialized medicine and no wars and perhaps inexpensive beautiful British Columbian land.

MOVED TO BRITISH COLUMBIA, CANADA TO HOMESTEAD

We started out in the Okanagan Valley, near Penticton, B.C. orchard country. The jet stream across the Pacific kept the area relatively tepid. It had snow but not as much as one might expect that far north. We got jobs picking fruit while we inquired on land availability. We had only saved a couple thousand dollars for land and my plan was to build my own log home with the wood on the land. At least that was our plan, however naïve. A few months into being there, our trusty 1976 Ford Mustang custom station wagon broke down. I spend hours under it trying to repair it but to no avail so we ended up leaving it for dead and bought a 1949 GMC pickup truck for $300 which was more suited to rural mountain life. Some of the people we met in the orchard towns told us that the Clearwater, BC area was nice and there were quite a few people settling up there. As the summer was already ending and we had spent far more than we were taking in, we took their advise and headed north to Clearwater, in the Canadian Rocky Mountains. We had a contact there who was very near the Wells Gray Provincial Park, some 30 miles along a dirt road from Clearwater, a town with a population of less than 1000 people, mostly consisting of mill workers, hunters and trappers. After being there a couple weeks we were just about broke. I recall living off of crackers, peanut butter and jelly day after day for the better part of a week before I found a job working for the provincial park on road maintenance. One of my jobs was to haul water to the workers camp everyday. We pumped water from the creek into a tanker truck to then pump it into the storage tank that fed the camp. Meals were provided to me but not to Tara so at lunch time, she would drive over to where the mess hall was and I’d sneak out food for her. As the summer season ended the job ended but I got another job working on a cattle ranch. We were given a cabin to live in on a remote part of the ranch that bordered the mountain wilderness that extended for many hundreds of miles north. We lived in that cabin through the winter. To live the winter we needed to tap into our last nest egg of perhaps $1000. The cabin had no facilities and we were expecting over 60 inches of snow and extended below zero temperatures so we needed to gear up. We traveled to Kamloops a hundred miles west for supplies. We bought a rifle and a shotgun to hunt. I decided if I was going to eat flesh foods I was going to hunt it myself. I had studied up on that as well while still in New York. We bought a Wood cook stove and an airtight heating stove to heat a poorly insulated log cabin of one room that was about 20 foot square at best. There was a creek 30 yds. from the house so I filled up a big milk urn and used a ladle. The out house was 10 yards away. I cut my own wood supply throughout the winter. Our driveway was a bear, a mile long, but one advantage was it was plowed by the provincial park people. I got chains for my truck and had a box outside the house to use as a freezer. We bought sacks of flour, grain and beans and rice and had access to some veggies in Clearwater 30 miles away.

This is where I learned to fall trees and wow did I make every mistake in the book and near killed myself several times. I was a lousy hunter though I went out daily in the foot of new snow that would fall nightly. We also made leather products, handbags, hats, belts and such and sold in a local store and to local farmers a bit. Tara was a good artist so would paint on leather as decoration. I looked for more work in Clearwater at the mill but jobs were few at the time and they didn’t take too kindly to giving them to Yankees from the states. Most of our friends were draft dodgers who came up there to escape the Vietnam draft and married Canadian women to become citizens. Our cabin was the last building on the trailhead to the mountain wilderness, a park that had many huge waterfalls and a majestic peak at every turn. Some mornings we would be awoken by a fully outfitted hunting party. They would all be mounted on horseback and have a couple pack animals. We’d make them a pot of coffee and see them off. We became good friends with a woodsman and his wife who also worked on the ranch but about a mile away from us. He had a good 4X4 and helped me get my truck out of the ditch several times. My chains would snap and the ice was treacherous at times and we almost slide right down the mountain several times. Just to get up my driveway, I’d have to gun it and fishtail around two dogleg turns climbing over a ridge. Sometimes I’d be coming home late at night from looking for work and would leave the truck on the road and walk a couple miles back in the heavy snow with no lights anywhere. I could not even see my hand in front of me and would know if I was on the road when I would start to hit the snow banks on the sides from previous plowing. We had a pet weasel in our cabin. He was pure white and would run around on the inside of the logs as we watched from our bed. We remained warm and cozy. Here we were suburban kids barely in their 20’s living in the wild. Stories abounded by the locals of this old timer who was attacked by a bear while in his bed and how he for some reason burnt down his house. In fact that old burned down house was in view of where our cabin was. There was nothing left but the foundation but it made the stories real. Part of the reason I bought a rifle was for protection from the wild that we so closely bordered. We had no telephone or neighbors within miles with which to dial 911. The woodsman friend Dave and Joan told of his experience in the northlands. He shot a wolverine with a six shooter, off his leg, no less as it was making his way to his throat. He was no story teller. He had all the scars to prove he’d lived one heck of a tough life, raised by his trapper/hunter dad. I never did shoot anything except a squirrel and grouse which don’t eat too well with buckshot imbedded, but Dave shot a dear and I skinned it and he gave us a large part along with moose meat he shot.

We made a bunch of friends up there. We had a sense of community. A new couple got married and I played hand drums at their ceremony. Then we all got together for a chinking party. They had a log cabin where they were going to live. Chinking is the stuff one puts in between the logs to keep out the weather. It can be made from any number of combinations of materials but straw and mud mixed together is a common one. At least that is what we used. People brought food, so it was a pot luck and a present to the bride and groom to get their cabin chinked for the harsh winter.

When we first went to Canada to live, we camped in the Okanagan area, on orchards where we picked fruit for some living. That summer we made a bunch of friends, other fruit pickers and such. We ended up starting some long term relationships. We often had get together around the fire where we played music. I was a decent percussionist and harmonica and recorder player. There were a few string players and singers so we had a band. Some of these ended up in the Clearwater area as well and we had a number of music fiascos. In fact in the middle of winter I organized a ho down in an empty community hall. We invited anyone and everyone and had a hoot. My draft dodger friends, some of whom were also of the hippy types would smoke some pot. They wanted so badly to get me stoned, but I was not interested. I was not even tempted.

CANADA DREAM SQUASHED – OFF TO JAIL I GO

Well, one day, while getting a few supplies from town, two Canadian Mounties pulled over our truck and took me to jail, instructing Tara to gather our belongings and meet me at the border. I was being deported. I never did learn what led to my arrest but the charge was working without a visa. This was true. I did not do anything official to be living and working in Canada legally. Canada to me was my backyard. My parents took the family to Canada several times for vacations. I traveled up to Canada by car and by thumb a number of times. I walked across the border with a backpack. I didn’t think of Canada as another country but that was my naivety of course and my idealism that borders were man made and really of no consequence. This was a wake up call, that’s for sure.

But, I can’t say it was completely unanticipated. When I started working for the Provincial Parks, I used the assumed name, Clay. Clay had been a nickname Tara’s little sister gave me. My thinking at the time was, if Canada had a problem with my working illegally, then at least my real name would not be on the books so to speak. I know this thinking was quite flawed but at the time, at 20 years old, I thought it made sense and surprisingly enough Tara went along with it. Then to further emphasize our sense at the time that we were in fact living in Canada illegally and could be apprehended, we decided upon a strategy to attempt to correct this, however ill conceived.

Somehow we got the idea, that if we left Canada, then upon return we would have a fresh start. What was flawed with this idea was that we never planned to officially leave Canada as we never officially entered, so who would know we were reentering? Well we did it anyway and it was not without incident. We took our British Columbia registered truck across the border into Blaine, Washington. Then we virtually turned the truck around and tried to reenter. At the border the Canadian Border guard asked me if I had used Marijuana. I suppose looking like a hippy, that was a standard question to ask. Well, since I had not used marijuana for several years, I said…”I haven’t used it for years”. Well, that was not the time to be honest. He refused us entrance and we were in a jam because we didn’t know if we’d get home. Our plan at this point was to try to get across another border crossing. We did know that the border guards might have communicated with one another but we had to take that chance. So we proceeded east in Washington state to the next crossing and the guard seeing that we had a British Columbia truck suspected that we were living in Canada illegally, instead of vacationing and refused us entry. We were starting to freak over this. We went into the nearest town to the border and started to inquire from anyone we thought might know, how we might get across the border unnoticed. We knew this was dangerous but felt between a rock and a hard place. One fellow told us of people who have crossed at a ranch. Sometimes there are dirt roads and we might have to cut a wire fence. We considered doing that but we decided before going that far, we might try one more border entrance. Well, somehow this next border guard let us through. We figured that perhaps their communication link broke down and this guard was not so conscientious. I recall driving north in Canada at the Penticton crossing, wondering if some Mounties would be in our pursuit. We made it back to our cabin and from that point on wondered if someday we’d be apprehended. It was months before those Mounties pulled us over. I wouldn’t be surprised if the Mounties put out the watch for us based on our truck and appearance and license plate. We did not have an address though we did get our mail general delivery at the Clearwater post office which we did check when we came into town. They could have learned we were in town from that.

I was taken to a jail in Kamloops, a town of about 50,000 people. It was a difficult experience because at the time I had a toothache and they would not give me any pain relievers as they were afraid I was a drug user. The only way I could get momentary relief was by swishing cold water on the tooth. So I ended up pacing the cell day and night. A few days later I was given a hearing. I had no lawyer and no case so it was just a matter of time until I would be transported south. I remember when Tara showed up at jail and she saw me in my jail clothes, she cried. She had our stuff, all except for our beautiful wood cook stove that no one could help her with. Other friends did help her but they couldn’t fit the stove. A few days later I was headed south in a jail bus. We were on the road and because I was drinking so much water to keep my toothache at bay, I had a full bladder. I yelled out that I needed to relieve myself and I was ignored. I waited a bit and said it again and again nothing. The third time I yelled out that if he didn’t stop soon I was going to pee on the floor rather than damage my bladder. He said, hold off, we’d be at a stop momentarily. We stopped at the next town where they had a jail and I could be safely let it to relieve myself.

CRYING AT THE BORDER

We arrived at the border and I was let loose to walk over to the American side. It was Washington state. Tara was already there with the truck. We both went in side to US customs – a small office manned by one or two officials. I remember how we both cried at being extricated from a place we had grown to love. The border guard was actually sympathetic and comforting. Nonetheless, we headed south towards Yakima, Washington. We had $50 left to our names.

We had decided to head to the west coast of Oregon, where I thought perhaps I could get fishing work. I was raised a fisher. My dad, uncle and granddad, the Czech side of the family were fishers and would take myself and my cousin out fishing weekends. We caught flounders, blowfish, fluke, crabs, eel and whatnot. I have this image of boiling crabs at home followed by my mom sitting for hours picking crab meat out of shells leaving a mountain of shells. I did my fair share of gutting and cleaning of fish as well.

JESUS FREAKS TAKE US IN

When we got to Yakima, we heard a clunk from the engine area and as it ended up, we lost our highest 3rd gear, so we were stranded.

We were looking for someone to help us in Yakima and saw this man walking, a tall bearded man. He actually approached us and asked if he could help us. His name was Ted. He was part of a small group of what might be called Jesus freaks of the day. They were an independent from any formal church group type of group. They took us in to their home, where perhaps three couples lived. Ted was a talented guy and a mechanic and fixed our truck. It needed a new transmission. He located it and personally installed it and didn’t even take our $50. We were there for about two weeks at which time we shared in their work and needs and their worship services. They had music in their services so I participated in that. I also did a great deal of debating scripture with them. From reading scripture a great deal I was aware of certain hypocrisies, at least that’s what I called them. I would bring them up and debate them with them. They send us off with a fixed truck, not one iota poorer than when we came. They were often helping anyone and everyone in the community. These were people truly trying to serve God in the Jesus fashion as best they could. A year or so later, Tara and I returned to Yakima to pick fruit for a season and looked up Ted and his wife, whose name escapes me now. We found them and had a good meeting.

ARRIVED IN NEWPORT, OREGON FLAT BROKE AND OUT OF GAS

Well, we landed in Newport, Oregon and the gas tank was reading empty and the $50 was gone. We sat in the truck looking out over a pacific ocean sunset. I thought, lets find a place to stay for the night. We went into town, a town of 5000 people and about the only places that were open were the bars. That’s where we met Zanadu and he was certainly a character. Tall, dark and handsome but in the Charles Manson sort of way. He had a very low raspy voice, but he gave us a place to sleep, it just happened to be someone else’s bed who was not home at the moment. A couple days later when she returned she was fuming that we’d slept in her bed and in fact I was not happy about it either after I took a look at her. Oh, well, we were not that clean cut either. As it turned out, Zanadu was in the midst of opening a junk shop, three storefronts down the street from this pub where we met. He was collecting anything he could sell and he was certainly a wheeler dealer personality. So we helped him clean up the store and do some painting and then we put some of our leather goods in a showcase he had. We had leftover leather from Canada. We ended up putting handbags and such in a nice new age type store in Newport as well and we sold some stuff. Through Zanadu we met Robert. Robert was the owner of Zanadu’s house. Robert was a Brooklyn transplant who had purchased a bunch of old and in disrepair ocean view homes right in town and he rented them to anyone who could pay which ended up being fishermen, hippies and transients. It wasn’t a dishonest lot, just a poor one. Since we were NY’ers we got along well with Robert and he introduced us to Ron and Judy. Ron, another Brooklyn transplant had moved out to southern Oregon in the 60’s and lived in a real hippy farm commune. He had also begged the spiritual path of treks to India, where he got sick and was taken in by locals and healed and expected to marry the community heads daughter, a story right out of Kipling or someone like that. Judy was Ron’s partner, a young girl of perhaps 19 or 20 who had two children from another man, a four year old named Jenny and a 1 yr. old named Noah. Ron thought of these kids as his own. They had a great little apartment in Newport immediately on an ocean cliff living above some older hippy astrologers. Newport, as it turned out was a hippy haven in 1972. Tara and I met all sorts of characters and I began playing music with various fellows. I was gigging for beer at one dock side pub and that woman whose bed we borrowed was drunk as a skunk one night and tried to give me one heck of a sloppy kiss, which I narrowly escaped, thank God. I never did take to drunk women or casual sex though the idea of it had it’s draw – just not something I could really dive into.

I took a job making outdoor furniture with a pornography buff. I didn’t know this on the outset, until one day he invited me and the other employee to his house after work. I wasn’t interested. Besides my infatuation with the female body, porn seemed deplorable, though I guess it’s all about the same thing, sex, something I still had an hefty appetite for, though Tara’s was waning.

LIVING ON THE SILETZ INDIAN RESERVATION

We rented a house in  Siletz, Oregon, actually on the Siletz Indian reservation along with some roommates, two single girls, Michelle and Patty and their part time boyfriends. Kent, Michelle boy friend was a great kind of guy. We got along well. He played dulcimer and I played flute with him and we would travel around playing here and there. One time we walked into a field of high grass and sat down and began to play. It was a crazy house and Tara’s sister Cara, having graduated high school came out from New York to live with us. I had started to smoke a little pot again. Those two brooklynites influenced me. I held off for a while but in the music scene it enhanced emotion so served to accentuate our performances, or so we thought. But more so it was because Ron and I loved to talk philosophy and spirituality. Tara didn’t approve of my pot smoking and especially when I used $30 from the $1000 she borrowed from her Dad, much of which went into the first/last months rent on the house. The house was wild but not in a druggy or sexy way, just wild with youth and music. I remember being perfectly straight and crawling around the floor barking like a dog chasing after whoever. I guess my past drug use had fried my brain.

FRESH PICKED PSYLLISYBIN MUSHROOMS

One day Tara and I picked our own psilocybin mushrooms that grew wild all over the cow pastures in that Oregon coastal rain forest environment. We each ate about 20 and wow was it gross. They tasted bad, bad, bad and they were so chewy, chewy, chewy. We both got sick, sick, sick and heaved ho, wrenched our guts, but afterwards were in la la land for hours. I would never do that again and neither would she. What was strange was that Tara seemed to want to do it more than I. I had experienced the “trip” many times before and can’t say it was always pleasant, but she was virtually untainted by the alter consciousness. In fact, she seemed to be a natural trip. One time, when she was perfectly straight, she said she saw two beings on a ridgeline not too far distant. I asked for more information and she just said they were there. It wasn’t something she thought she saw out of the corner of her eye or something she was imagining. She thought she saw them. I saw nothing of the sort, no place, no how.

Well nearing winters end, my job ended and so did keeping the house because my boss stopped paying me. It was strange that the next time I saw my coworker he had a bandage on his hand. He had cut off a finger on a saw. While I was working there, I always thought he was a little too confident. The boss had taken a liking to him so he got to do more of the sawing and I did more of the sanding. I guess sometimes what seems like the lessor position might turn out to be the better one. So, we had a little money left so decided we were sort of stagnant in the Newport area.

SUMMER MIGRANT WORKER IN THE FRUIT ORCHARDS

We decided to hitchhike to Yakima, Washington and Hood River, Oregon to pick fruit for the season, which is where we reunited with Ted the generous hearted Jesus enthusiast and his wife, whose name slips my mind. The truck was just too costly to drive. While camping in the apple orchard, Tara tells me she wants to visit our Canadian friends Linda and Alde in British Columbia. I was against it as we didn’t have transportation. I couldn’t go as I thought I’d be turned away at the border due to my deportation. She went anyway and my heart broke. We had not been apart for even a day in four years. It was the beginning of her independence though. She hitchhiked up there alone. Alde was a handsome guy we’d met in Canada who Tara was somewhat infatuated with, or so it seemed while we lived up there. They stuck to tickle fights as strange as that sounds, at least as far as I knew but I knew there could be some fire there so I was a little jealous and that was part of the reason I didn’t want her to go. She also got into those tickle fights with Dave the woodsman which was also strange. I recall in our Canada cabin, Dave and Joan would come over for tea and cookies. There wasn’t any TV or anything much to do but read and talk. Tara and Dave would start tickling and Joan and I would just look at each other as if to say…what’s this about…are we supposed to be getting it on too, which neither of us really felt inclined to. However the main reasons I was upset by Tara’s trek north without me were her safety and yes, my loneliness or feeling rejected. Alde had been down to the states to visit us once since we left Canada and he and I were good friends so I trusted him. I recall sitting in my tent in the orchard at night alone and weepy. I couldn’t even play the flute. I just did not have the energy, the breath nor desire to create music. I was unhappy because I felt this was the beginning of the end of our relationship. I learned later that more stages were yet to come. I was no angel with other women though I never went beyond lusting in my head. I even had some chances but never took them. The reasons were two fold. I was shy and didn’t want to hurt Tara.

TARA AND I HAVE A FIRST PARTING

So she went to Canada and came back three or four days later and had little to say of her experience and I didn’t ask much either. Upon returning to Newport, we took another job picking holly, you know that Christmas mistletoe stuff with sharp pointy leaves.

With the little money we earned we took a trek around Oregon for a new place to live. We went all the way east to Bend, Oregon, then south to Crater Lake area and back up through Eugene and could find nothing we could afford but we sure burned our budget down to the end. So we went back to Newport and were turned on to a place to stay for $30/month. It was a big, broken down trailer in the woods close to Waldport, Oregon maybe 15 miles or so south of Newport. We moved our stuff and decided to spend the rest of the cold wet winter in the south, so once again we stuck out the thumbs. We made our way to San Diego where Patty our Siletz roommate had moved and she put us up. It was great down there in the sun. We even applied for public assistance with San Diego and they put us on a work program. I drove around on a truck picking up trash for 3 days and in return got about $100 and some food stamps. We didn’t need much. I have several distinct memories from that time. One is when I was at an airport, perhaps picking up trash as part of that job. I was approached by a Hare Krishna person. We talked and he ended up giving me a copy of the Bhagavad Gita. It was a 6 inch thick large book. Another was while waiting for public assistance a Jesus freak began a debate with me and I felt like I held my own quite well in his bible backed language as I was no stranger to the bible. In the end he blessed me but said Tara was the devil keeping me from God. I recall hitchhiking east from San Diego to Lake Havasu City, Arizona and this guy picked us up and said he was a preacher and that the Lord told him to pick us up. He said, whenever the spirit moves him, he gets goose bumps all over his arms and that happened to him when he saw us standing on the side of the road. I remember getting into Arizona and being broke and hungry and going to a church to ask for help and they gave us a voucher for some food. We went to Lake Havasu, again looking for opportunity, but also because my folks had just purchased a condo there. We stayed in it though it had no lights or A/C or furniture. It was not a good time. We returned to San Diego and met up with my sister who had just enlisted into the Navy, at my mother’s suggestion. She was stationed at Coronado Island. We hadn’t seen each other for some years, so it was great. She was grown up. I later learned that was the height of her party life in the Navy and where she met her husband who she became pregnant by and who then abandoned her.

So with no luck finding anything we were inclined to become a part of in California we hitched back north. On the way back, along highway 1, the Pacific coast highway, we hit a glitch. A policeman arrested me for hitchhiking as I was the one sticking out my thumb. What infuriated me was that he took me away in the patrol car and left Tara there alone to get home by…yes, by thumb as it was in the middle of nowhere and we were still virtually broke. We didn’t hitchhike for the fun of it. I spent the night in a local California jail. The next day we drove north a bit and I stayed the night in another jail. The next day they took me to Portland, OR where I was in general lock up. The next day I was arraigned. I was to pay a fine of near $300 I believe. I told the judge I had no money and no way to pay so he said I could spend 3 more days in jail instead of paying the fine, which is what I did. Tara made it home okay and she with some friends picked me up at the Portland jail. By the way there were no signs against hitchhiking, as there are on many freeways in the west. It wasn’t on the freeway. It was on the Pacific coast highway. It was ridiculous but they had the power over me so I went along.

To add difficulty to our situation, when we returned to our trailer, we saw that we had been robbed. My nice conga drums were gone and some other stuff. It ended up it was the young son of the landlord and I got the drums back and some other stuff but not all of it. I guess it was a karmic payback for my petty thievery which for whatever it was worth was never against a person with the exception of some cigarette from the person I was babysitting for and that was less than a pack. I stole from organizations. I’m not really justifying it. It was wrong. It was interesting though that even though these prize possessions of mine were taken, I was not angry with the robber, just like I was not angry with Hobbit in trying to steal my for all intents and purposes my wife. I did not try to press charges or anything. I just wanted my drums back so I could continue in the band.

ACCELLERATED NEW AGE SPIRITIUALITY

It was about this time that we started to get more spiritual. We began participating in various meditation groups around Newport. At one meeting, I was outside and the group said they saw a huge light in the room. Then for several times we danced with the Sufis. One other occasions we meditated on the picture of an ascended master, in this case Sri Chinmoy. A fellow musician who I played with sometimes and who was an exceptional guitarist was a strong devotee. Meanwhile every night I was reading the Bhagavad Gita while Tara embroidered and did whatnot. I continued practicing the flute and was getting better fairly fast.

THE BEGINNING OF MY FIRST GIGGING BAND – CATHARSIS

It was about this time that we met Paul, a good rhythm guitarist with a great look, a fine voice, a romantic style and manner and not bloated with success. He and I became a number in the sense that I was a good percussionist, harmonica player and I had just began playing flute. Mainly he needed percussion. We attracted a good lead guitarist named Dave who could duplicate every Dylan song he ever did. We didn’t do Dylan in our act though as our repertoire was all Paul’s original love songs in a Trinidad rhythm which I was fairly adept at maintaining percussively. Paul was of Trinidad decent. And then we added an upright bass player. We had a band and called it Catharsis I believe. We gigged wherever we could. We played at Canyon West in Newport. It was a combo Heath Food Store, Natural Food Restaurant/Bakery, New Age Bookstore under one large roof and in the middle was seating against a large stage. This is where I first felt the ego of a performer. I would gloat a bit I admit while setting up. I was proud of our music. When we first got together we were in The Dalles near Hood River, Oregon visiting friends. Actually we were seriously considering moving there to homestead on some raw land. We scoped out a site along with three other couples. While in Hood River one night we started playing music on the street, that is until the police told us to move along. But it was at our friends house that I got two things. First, it is where I had my ear pierced. Some girl who said she had done it before volunteered and put some ice on my lobe and then ground her way though my ear lobe with a pin. The ice numbness never really did take and wore off. She kept going and going and was admittedly having trouble with my earlobe. Finally she got through and I immediately passed out. If you recall I passed out easily from any trauma. Not a very tough guy I guess. I awoke a joker as usual though. That night the band first got together electrically and with a full drum set that I played in addition to the Congas. It was pure magic. Yes, we smoked some weed but the music really flowed. There were slow melodys that were heavenly with light cymbal work just in the right places and there were toe taping Latin sounding rhythms with sensitive lead guitar and bass work. We knew we had a great sound. We didn’t homestead there. It was just too dry to try to live there and build there though there was a decent site in a gorge by a creek, just not much access by road.

Paul as it turned out was making his living as a painter – a house painter that is so he hired me as a helper and it was fun and we played music all the time. We played for meals at nice trendy Newport restaurants. We played at a fair in a neighboring town. We played for slide shows. There was a local photographer that had just returned from Alaska. So he showed the slides and we played the music during the presentation and it was advertised and attracted maybe a hundred people and we were a successful band, at least for small time potatoes. I don’t recall our pay. I know it wasn’t much. On the side I played for a good Belly Dancer and her flute playing boyfriend. We did several demos for the Newport community. They generated a couple hundred people. I was considered a very good improvisational percussionist. I didn’t have to practice much with whoever I was playing with. I seemed to be able to stop and the right places and change at the right places and get fast and loud or slow and quiet at the right places and perhaps my biggest asset was an ability to stop on a dime to make really professional finishes. I also played for an African Dance Class. Nothing paid big dollars but it was something.

TARA HAS A BRIEF AFFAIR – MY HEART BROKE

But my music had some problems associated. I would always be on stage playing or practicing and Tara wasn’t really involved. At shows she’d be near or dancing and she was a good dancer and rather attractive with her dark Turkish look with long, long thick black hair nearly down to her knees that she’d wave around like a flag while wearing colorful long skirts. So she attracted men and one became her dance partner and soon became more than that. I was troubled by that, in fact devastated when I was out of the picture. I recall walking the highway talking out loud to whatever or whoever might hear me, angry but sad. I certainly had a jealous streak but not so much so that I kept a rein on her. I wasn’t that angry with Hobbit, as he called himself. He was an elf of a guy, cute I suppose, and he seemed to always be tripped out more than just on weed. He was likable and he loved the ladies and was a sweet lure. After a week in the doldrums I accepted her choice and decided it wasn’t going to rule my life. Shortly after my acceptance of her new relationship Hobbit dumped her, as she said, and she came running back to me. I forgave her and we moved on, but I knew we’d changed. We were no longer the naïve lovers we started out as. We’d been though a lot. I guess we both grew up some.

It was about this time, that we decided on a new direction. Robert, the fellow who owned all those houses in Newport also owned a 10 acre parcel of land in Waldport, Oregon, 20 or so miles south of Newport. This was his home, an A frame he built some years prior. We had become close to him and Ron and Judy so he invited us to build a house on his property and to live there. It sounded good to us. We had already been involved in expanding and tending a big vegetable garden there. So we located a spot, down in a gully, near a creek and built a lean to that we camped in while I began building our house. I planned to build a Tee Pee shaped house out of logs. I found the trees I could use on his property and cut them down, stripped them of bark, let them dry a little and then treated them with creosote. While they were drying, which wouldn’t have really been enough time to stop their checking, I built the foundation. I used cinder blocks. Robert had an account with the Waldport hardware store that he allowed me to use. He also had some old lumber and windows he donated to our project. I ran logs from one cider block post to the other, notching them together. I knew a little about what I was doing from my study of log cabin building before our move to British Columbia and I was handy with a chain saw and axe, the main tools I would use. Next I sank a middle pole into concrete into the ground and attached a carved star to the top. I ran the prepared logs from the foundation joists to this crown to form the skeleton of the structure. Next I laid floor joists to the middle pole and put down a crude floor that I layered. Then I framed the sides bringing them out as bay windows and then built a loft floor.

COMPELLED TO HITCHIKE BACK TO NEW YORK TO SEE FAMILY

For some reason I, at this time felt compelled to visit my family back east. Tara was not really in approval of it. We had a long history of contention on my relationship with my mother. I think it must have stemmed from the fact that when she was 15 she lost her mother in a terrible accident. Her mother was hospitalized for pneumonia and was medicated to assist with sleeping but apparently the rails on her bed were not put up one night and she rolled off the bed and hit her head, went into a comma and died a short time later. I can only imagine how that would hurt and affect one for their entire life. Maybe I’m wrong about this reason for Tara’s objections at my desire for contact with my mother. Perhaps it was also because my mother was always on my case about not calling them more often. I was not great on that score and frequently it was about cost. Long distance charges in the early 70’s were not cheap and especially for us as at times we were well below any poverty statistics. I called collect at times. Whenever I did, I got yelled at for not calling more. I wrote infrequently. I guess I was an insensitive kid who was out gallivanting but it was not really new to my mother. When I left for college, I already had quite the estranged relationship with my folks. I loved them but as I rebelled so from their parenting style so I could do what I wanted to do and went far afield from what to them would have been a good kid they could be proud of. Nearly flunking out of high school, and drug usage, lying, stealing, Hitchhiking all over the place, then shacking up with a Jewish girl (though my parents certainly liked Tara), then to move to a distant part of the globe, getting deported and living a hippy life so to speak were not considered favorable ways to be living. I basically fought against my parents wishes by tooth and nail and not being in more regular communication was really just par for the course. So when I would bring up to Tara that I wanted to call them, she generally objected and we’d argue about it, bringing up how I didn’t want to get married without consulting my mother all over again. But Tara agreed to take the trip back east with me and lacking funds and considering our truck was in disrepair we decided to hitchhike and this time we would travel a northern U.S. route. This was our first trip back east. It was an uneventful trip that took about a week. I remember getting to my parents house fairly late and night and as the door was locked I tapped on my little brother’s window. He was now about 14 years old and wow was he excited. We stayed up all night telling the stories of our Canadian wilderness adventure and life in Oregon. We stayed around for about a week. I remember talking to my brother and sister, who must have been home on leave from the Navy about spirits and reincarnation and how I came to believe in both. I am noting this because I felt like I had a real sense of the existence of spirit. It seemed more real to me than what we only read about and wondered about. While in my home town I remember, my mom and dad had sold a car for me, one I left behind years back. They decided to give me my share of the money, a little over $200 bucks. I took it and bought a new flute. I had been using a nickel plated student model and now I was getting a brand new silver plated student model. While home on Long Island I visited with an old boyhood friend, Ron, who was now a professional drummer working the upstate New York clubs. He was teaching drums also and just so happened had a drum set a student was upgrading from, so he offered it to me for nothing or next to nothing. We shipped them to Oregon. We spent time with most of my extended family. We also spent plenty of time with Tara’s family. They liked me in general, that is her dad, stepmom and Uncle. The rest of the family didn’t like that I was a Catholic. They made that known during several family gatherings. They were outright nasty with things they would say but I was the guy their Tara had chose so what could they do.

Tara was quite independent minded. Tara’s uncle wanted her to visit her grandmother and didn’t want her hitchhiking so he bought us a bus ticket to Florida that would continue on to our new home in Oregon. It was about August of 1975 when we returned home and we were greeted by big warm smiles from Robert, Ron and Judy who were hard at work in the garden.

BEGINNING OF A NEW PHASE – A COMMUNE

Times were fairly good. We had a place to lay our heads building this new house. My band was regularly playing and I was making a little money at it. We would hitchhike to Newport and back frequently for music and a social life and for occasional work. Cara by the way had been living with a guy she met there. We would see her frequently around town. She had her own truck, somewhat like ours and seemed quite content with her life which didn’t cross paths with us much. Her dad sent her money now and again.

But our lives were about to really change in the most dramatic way I suppose it could have, short of something life threatening occurring, though this certainly was seen by our relatives as that traumatic.

THE END OF THE BEGINNING

Chapter Two – First Contact with Bo and Peep’s H.I.M – Human Individual Metamorphosis

It was in Newport, Oregon, a small north-western U.S. coastal fishing town where I was first introduced to the group via a posted meeting announcement. It was September of 1975, just a month after the 17th of August when I turned 24 years old. Tara and I had just spent the night at Paul’s place. I was the percussionist/drummer, harmonica and flute player in Paul’s band. We had had a jam session that as usual extended into the wee hours. Tara and I had been living together for over five years by then. We both grew up in the same town on Long Island in New York, a suburb of Manhattan where I was born. We met a year or so after graduating from different high schools and through quite a twisty turn of events that took us hitchhiking all over Canada, the U.S. and briefly into Mexico for over 10,000 miles ended up in Newport. We lived in Waldport, just 20 minutes by car south on the Pacific coast highway. It often took us longer to make the trek to Newport as we frequently traveled by thumb. In this case our 1949 GMC pickup truck, we’d bought in Canada some 3 years before for $350 was temporarily out of commission. The last time we drove it home to Waldport, it’s driver side wheel came off while driving 55 mph and we skidded on the wheel drum until it would operate no more. I somehow got the wheel back on and thumped it the last few miles home.

On this somewhat clear morning, with little sleep under our belts we stumbled out of Paul’s house, one of many old houses populated by hippies and fishers. We were not wild partiers. Tara never drank alcohol and only rarely tried smoking pot. Her personality was naturally high. On the only occasion where she partook of the dreaded illegal plant she nearly scared me to death and from just one little toke on the pipe. It was actually one of my prime introductions to the “unseen” world, setting the stage for future belief.

One night in about 1970 Tara and I were watching TV together, kind of cuddling like some lovers do and she decided she would try marijuana for the first time. I had been a pot/acid head for several years prior. Anyway, so we smoked one hit each. In minutes she was hallucinating with closed eyes that we were on Noah’s Ark and she was describing in detail the animals and all as if she was seeing it in her head in Technicolor. Scared me big time and I was trying to calm her down, afraid she was going to flip out as she was relating what she saw in a shocked kind of way. It wasn’t pot laced with anything as that was not done back then. I don’t know how or when it started but all I can recall is feeling fear. We were clutching one another like you’d see in Hollywood and I couldn’t keep from looking at her bedroom door that went to the hallway of the big house she lived in with her dad and stepmom. And the fear kept building for both of us. Now I did have many minor hallucinations while under the influence of other drugs like acid and mescaline in years earlier, but never felt this kind of paranoia from pot, not in the least. After some time, perhaps 10-15 minutes of feeling this fear – feeling like there was something on the other side of the door about to burst in, something evil, I was building the courage to go open the door because I also knew this was crazy – it had to be all in our minds. She didn’t tell me to be fearful of anything and we didn’t talk about it so somehow I was either being affected by her or something else. She also felt the fear and by then had stopped talking about Noah’s Arc. I sat up to go to the door, when all of a sudden the door burst open (we never locked it) and Tara’s younger sister of 14 came rushing into the room crying hysterically. She was an attractive physically developed young girl. She calmed down a bit and began to explain what had just happened. She said as she was walking home, a man stopped his car and somehow grabbed her and tried to physically pull her into the car but she broke loose and ran all the way home scared to death. Wow, was I shocked. I stopped smoking pot then and there. Besides dreams and feelings, that was my most concrete (non-substance induced) experience to demonstrate a reality beyond the obvious physical that had interface with the physical. Little did I know there were many more to come.

But coming out of the house, the ocean was as usual quite beautiful to see and feel. It was still a bit foggy as it is most mornings on the Pacific Northwest’s coast and less than fifty yards from the cliff perched beach house was a little general store. Just outside the store on a pole I noticed a poster and called Tara to come over and take a look. It read:

UFO’s

– Why they are here
– Who they have come for
– When they will leave.

Not a discussion of UFO sightings or phenomena

Two individuals say they were sent from the level above human, and are about to leave the human level and literally (physically) return to that next evolutionary level in a spacecraft (UFO) within months! “The Two” will discuss how the transition from the human level to the next level is accomplished, and when this may be done.

This is not a religious or philosophical organization recruiting membership. However, the information has already prompted many individuals to devote their total energy to the transitional process. If you have ever entertained the idea that there may be a real, PHYSICAL level beyond the Earth’s confines, you will want to attend this meeting. ************************

I remember reading it several times and commenting to Tara on the unusual content. “Two individuals say they were sent from the level above human”. “I’ve got to go to this just to see what these folks look like”, I recall saying to Tara with a curious but cautious tone. To date there were many groups I’d taken some interest in but none I felt like joining. She seemed equally interested and it became the main topic of conversation for the next few days prior to the Sunday afternoon meeting. Curiously the reference to UFO’s meant little to nothing to me. In fact a couple months or so before seeing this poster I didn’t know anything at all about UFO’s, that is except for science fiction TV shows or movies like the Jetsens, the Outer Limits and the Twilight Zone, fictitious stuff. But then there was one time while we were visiting our best friends Ron and Judy at their second story apartment on the same cliff where Paul lived and where we jammed. That evening Ron had the radio on and as Ron and I often partook of a little bud, that’s pot, I was a little spaced out, no pun intended, when I tuned into the radio part way into what to me sounded like a news cast. It was saying that a crashed disk had been found near Roswell and that it contained what were believed to be alien bodies. I perked up immediately and remembers exclaiming, “Did you all here that…there was a crashed disk and alien bodies found!!!”. Neither Ron, nor Judy nor Tara even looked at me with more than a glance and certainly said nothing about it. They were preparing dinner and Ron was watching the news on TV so perhaps they didn’t hear the radio that was on more for Judy in the kitchen though all sounds were evident in this tiny apartment.

However, unbeknown to me at the time my interest in what the poster said was also peaked for less obvious reasons. The part that stood out most, beside these two being from this “other place” was where it said how it had “already prompted many individuals to devote their total energy”. At the time, not knowing hardly anything about it, I hadn’t thought I wanted to do that, not even knowing what that entailed. I guess it did put a sense of urgency and seriousness on it that stood out among the myriad of spiritual movements that flooded the west coast environment in the early 70’s. Nothing of the dozen or so movements I was aware of ever spoke of giving one’s “total” energy. I know the fact that it mentioned returning via spacecraft to the next level in months didn’t affect me. I was not excited by the idea at all.

I remember talking to my closest friends about it and a number of them also planned to attend the meeting which was less than a week away and just so happens was to be held in a small restaurant on the coast just north of Waldport where I was in the process of participating with two other couples in a small startup commune. It was my friend Robert’s land upon which he had an A frame house. We had about 1/4 acre producing garden and I was down the ravine a bit building our own house. I had cut the trees down, prepared them and had begun my own T-Pee design made of large poles to a center pole on a cinder block and log foundation. It was about halfway constructed with lots of windows on each of it’s six sides forming the walls that squared off the bottom level, a floor, and a spiral staircase to the loft all made with either forest logs or salvaged materials. I had studied log cabin building a couple years before as Tara and I left Long Island hoping to homestead in British Columbia, Canada, part of that twisty trek to Oregon

Chapter Three – The Meeting – The Two

The meeting room in the restaurant was very full to standing room only, perhaps 200 people. There was a high stage area. Each participants chair had a legal size handout that was typewritten and filled the 8 1/2 x 14 inch page with hardly a margin.

This handout was the first statement of “The Two” as some called them, Bo and Peep to others, Guinea and Pig to still others, all names they used to introduce themselves. Their legal human names were not important to the content of the information they sought to deliver. Later they would take the names Ti and Do, (pronounced Tea and Doe – from the notes on the musical scale). This document was written in March of 1975 by Do (aka Bo and Guinea) while he was in jail for keeping a rental car longer than they had paid for. When the car they left Houston with broke down they rented another but quickly ran out of money to pay for it so periodically they wrote letters to the rental car company explaining that they had the car and fully intended to pay for it but didn’t have the money yet. In any case, they were apprehended for a completely unrelated reason which turned up that the rental car company had reported the car stolen. When Do got out of jail on a plea bargain for time served, at that time 6 months, they headed to a friend’s place in Ojai, California, where Peep(Ti) typed up what Bo(Do) wrote and sent out some ninety copies to every religious and spiritual leader they could think of.

The leader of a Los Angeles meditation group was on their list and was intrigued by their “Statement” so sent two of his students to meet with Bo and Peep to check them out and potentially invite them to speak to his group, which they did. Statement 1 read as follows:

Statement 1

What religions have sought to understand since the beginning of their origin is what is above the human level of existence. Most have taught that if an individual lives a “good life” adoring some savior that he will inherit some “heaven” after his death. Only if it were that simple. That viewpoint is as inaccurate as the caterpillar believing that if he dies a good caterpillar he will mysteriously awaken in a rose blossom and live there forever with the King butterfly. He must become a butterfly while a healthy caterpillar – overcoming his decaying option.  If he rises above all caterpillar ways, converts all his energies to the pursuit of becoming literally another creature who circulates in another world, he becomes a butterfly. Likewise a human who seeks only to become a member of his next evolutionary kingdom may become a member of that kingdom if he completely overcomes all the aspects and influences of the human level providing he has found favor with a member of that next level who will direct him through his metamorphosis.  As the caterpillar, the human can complete this changeover only before his death as a human.  A member of the next kingdom finds favor with one who is willing to endure all of the necessary growing pains of weaning himself totally from his human condition. Members of that next kingdom are no more confined to human limitations than butterflies to caterpillar limitations.  Nor do they in like comparison concern themselves with human type indulgences or concerns.  However, if the human is thought of as the larva of that next kingdom then there are, at times, those who are approaching the completion of their individual metamorphosis and are beginning to have some of the attributes and characteristics of that next kingdom.  When the metamorphosis is complete their “perennial” and cyclic nature is ended for their “new” body has overcome decay, disease and death.  It has converted over chemically, biologically, and in vibration to the “new” creature. Approximately 2,000 years ago an individual of that next kingdom forfeited his body of that kingdom and entered a human female’s womb, thereby incarnating as the one history refers to as Jesus of Nazareth.  He awakened to this fact gradually through the same metamorphic process and came to know that he had incarnated for the express purpose of telling and showing, even to the point of proof, that the next kingdom can be entered by overcoming the human aspects and literally converting into a “man” or creature of that next kingdom – the kingdom of his Father – one who is already a member of that kingdom.  By His resurrection He proved that death can be literally overcome and that a permanent body for the next kingdom is acquired from the human kingdom. He did not leave His body in the grave.  He converted it into His body of that next kingdom. This is the only way the next kingdom is entered permanently. Each human has that full potential.  Jesus’ “Christing” or christening was completed at His transfiguration (metamorphic completion) and He remained in the “larva” environment, with other humans, only for some 40 days to show that His teaching had been accomplished.  He showed them His new body and demonstrated a few of its new attributes, i.e., appearing and disappearing (changing His vibrations) before their eyes while letting some of His friends touch His “new” body.  This could be compared to a butterfly remaining in the caterpillar world for a few days to show them what they had to look forward to if they chose to seek true conscious communication with a butterfly and were willing to overcome all of their caterpillar ways.  Then Jesus left them in a cloud of light (what humans refer to as UFO’s) and moves and returns in the same manner.

There are two individuals here now who have also come from that next kingdom, incarnate as humans, awakened, and will soon demonstrate the same proof of overcoming death.  They are “sent” from that kingdom by the “Father” to bear the same truth that was Jesus’.  This is like a repeat performance, except this time by two (a man and a woman) to restate the truth Jesus bore, restore its accurate meaning, and again show that any individual who seeks that kingdom will find it through the same process.  This “re-statement” or demonstration will happen within months.  The two who are the “actors” in this “theatre” are in the meantime doing all they can to relate this truth as accurately as possible so that when their bodies recover from their “dead” state (resurrection) and they leave (UFO’s) those left behind will have clearly understood the formula.

Those who can believe this process and do it will be “lifted up” individually and “saved” from death – literally.  If you seek those two while they are here they will gladly fill you in on the details and assist those who wish to follow in this “path.”

If this speaks to you – respond – according to your capabilities or needs.  For your sake – give this opportunity your best.

End of Statement 1

I read the document rather quickly and took particular interest to it’s references to Jesus. Everything made sense to me but I wanted to see these two. What did they look like – two people who say they are from this “other” level somewhere in outer space.

They walked out onto the stage and looked ordinary. They took seats and just sat quietly looking out onto the audience without expression. One was a woman and one a man, both in their 40’s. They looked normal. I saw nothing about them that looked unusual. They both wore greenish windbreakers and in that they did resemble one another. They both had what I would call butch haircuts slightly over the ears on the sides. As they sat silently, I recall thinking, what are they waiting for? Some minutes passed.

Bo then began to speak about a “light” that has come close to our planet Earth that bears an opportunity for a very brief time. They said they were representatives from the Next Level incarnate to offer membership in that Kingdom. They said it was a physical kingdom with many members and that this was the way new members were born into that kingdom, by overcoming their human attachments when Next Level reps were present who would guide them through the overcoming process. They talked about the content of the Statement I’d just read but hardly digested so it all sounded new to me. Bo got to a point where he said the “process” of transition from human to membership in this Next Evolutionary Level Above Human, what Jesus called the Kingdom of Heaven was a kind of metamorphosis just like what we see in a caterpillar moving into the Butterfly world. The caterpillar must all but cease being a caterpillar to allow for all it’s energy to be used to create it’s wings – a new body that is no longer limited in the ways of the old one. He explained that it was the same for a human. When the opportunity presents itself by the incarnate presence of members from that Kingdom Level a human can choose to leave life as they know it to engage in their own metamorphosis. This amounts to walking out the door of one’s entire life to devout all their energies to this process full time. He reiterated that they were here now to help those who wanted their help. He stated that in practical terms it meant no longer engaging in relationships, marriages, sex, business, schooling, entertainment or family. He said that this opportunity was not open to children because they could not decide on their own yet and parents can not in this case rightfully decide for them.

At this point I heard a loud voice from the back of the room, “You ought to be shot” a woman shouted, and it’s about then that I noticed that the air around these two was hazy. They had two spot lights on them on the stage and it was lighter than the rest of the rather dark room but then I turned my head and noticed this same haze hanging throughout the middle of the room and it had a shimmering motion to it. I didn’t think it was smoke. I smelled no smoke and I was once a smoker so was quite sensitive to the smell. If it was smoke there was a lot of it but it didn’t act like smoke. It wasn’t as dense.

The air in the room was certainly tense with so many different people there listening to this plain Jane presentation of hard to believe material though for me it seemed to make total sense. There was no hell fire and brimstone, no saying anyone must do this, no pressure saying if you don’t you’ll burn in hell, no glamorous presentation, no paraphernalia as is so common with virtually every religious denomination and it was so simple. They never asked for money or had any books to sell.

Then Bo said, if anyone has any questions they can stay after and that there were some in the audience that have decided to make this their total effort who could help you with your questions.

I looked at Tara and she at me and we both had grins on our faces and knew this was what we wanted.

On the same row we sat in there were two of the group’s members Bo spoke of. They introduced themselves as Logan and Sooner – a very tall grey haired man in his late 40’s and a younger woman. We said we wanted to join so they told us to put our lives in order but try not to take more than 2-3 days to do so as they were on the move and there would be no way to find them if we did not make the agreed upon rendezvous where they would tell us where to go next. They also said the longer we take the more difficult it could be to take this step, as forces in the world would attempt to keep you from doing so. They explained that they were traveling and camping so we could bring with us anything that would be helpful to include camping gear, automobiles and of course funds. There was no minimum – everyone was sharing what they had. They gave us a park location and time to be in Eugene, Oregon which was just a couple hours from Waldport.

That’s when the Earth shook, not literally, but in our lives and the lives of those we had formed relationships. I remember going around to all of our friends to tell them what we experienced and what we were about to do. Most just listened but had little to say. Ron and Judy had also decided to join as did Robert who owned the land we were homesteading on. And Greg a fine musician I used to play with occasionally was joining also.

I remember telling everyone that I felt like I was sitting in front of the equivalent of Jesus. They didn’t say either of them was Jesus, just that they came from the same place Jesus came from and had the same information of how to make the transition to the Next Level – aka Kingdom of Heaven, not a place we attain to automatically after we die if we’ve lived a good life. No one knew me as a Jesus freak or even a Christian. I also felt my life passed before my eyes and everything seemed geared to that moment like this was my fate or destiny.

Chapter Four – Leaving my life behind to give my all to the metamorphic process

Tara and I knew we’d be splitting up. Just a few months earlier we had just such a preview. We broke up for a week or so which was very traumatic for me for most of that time yet I pulled through it and began to move on but as it turned out we got back together. This was different – it was a mutual breakup as we both seemed full steam ahead in this new direction not hardly aware of just how bizarre it was for virtually everyone else we knew.

One of the first people we told was Tara’s younger sister, Clara who was just 19 by then. Clara came out from New York to live with us over a year earlier, as soon as she graduated high school. After living with us for some six months in a house we rented on the Siletz Indian reservation, near Newport, she met a local guy and before too long was living with him and we hardly saw her.

Clara freaked out at the news or our joining and pending indefinite departure. It was understandable of course. Though she was living on her own, had a job and a truck and a steady boyfriend and lived separate from us, she still wanted to be close to her sister. They had been very close ever since their mother died from a freak accident in the hospital where she was being treated for pneumonia and was given a sedative to sleep and the attendants did not put up the bed rails. She fell out of bed and hit her head, went into a coma and died. Tara was 16. Clara was 11. I wish I could say I was sensitive to Clara’s feelings. I was not. I was more selfish than I ever had been before it seemed.

As we exited the meeting we ran into our two best friends, Ron and Judy. They were also planning on joining. We had just visited them in their seaside second floor apartment to talk about going to our Eugene rendezvous together, just a couple days away. When we got downstairs we were met at the door by Clara and two police officers. Clara had gone to the police to try to stop us. She knew Ron and Judy were also leaving and she knew Judy had two children – a girl whose name escapes me, who was perhaps four and a 1 1/2 yr. old boy named Noah. Ron was not their father. Judy had been separated from their dad for over a year or two by then. They were living together as a happy family. Ron loved the kids and acted as their father, but they too were taken by Bo and Peep’s message, so Judy was talking with her X about taking the kids for a while so they could check this out. He had agreed, I understood. The police said to me that Clara had reported to them that some children were about to be abandoned. I denied any such knowledge which made Clara furious. Tara said nothing. The police left and Clara stayed back and there was a great deal of yelling and crying between Clara and Tara. When Clara saw Tara’s resolve she threatened to drive her truck over the cliff. We didn’t take her seriously.

The next day Tara’s dad, uncle and grandmother flew out from New York at Clara’s behest to try to talk her out of this wild idea. We met with them including Clara in their motel and again there was discussion and lots of tears and some yelling, exhaustion and it ended with frustration. I said little. They all liked me, but then I was this Catholic while Tara was a Jew, so all the talk of Jesus pointed to my influence over Tara. I don’t recall in the five years Tara and I lived together that I ever talked with her about Jesus. I knew that she believed in who Jesus was but that was about it.

The next morning Tara and I looked at one another and knew we could wait no longer. We needed to leave town immediately or else who knows what might have happened to try to stop us. We had actually tied up our loose ends as instructed.

I did not have much in terms of possessions, a truck and some instruments I played – flute, harmonica, Conga drums and a drum set. I’d been in a band with Paul that simply formed when I met him a year or so before. He was such a tall, dark and handsome, charismatic, romantic singer and played a lovely finger picking styled custom made acoustic guitar. His Mom was from Trinidad. Paul had a natural flare for rhythm when he played and we were an instant fit as percussion was my first love, besides Tara that is. We were joined by Dave on lead guitar – an excellent player who knew and performed every Bob Dylan song that existed, though our band was strictly Paul’s originals. And we had a stand up bassist. Just a week earlier we were all together looking to buy a PA. We had gigs most weekends, often in one of several restaurants where we’d be paid with great gourmet meals. The most fun we had was playing for a slide show. A successful Newport photographer had just returned from Alaska and was putting on a show of his slides from his trip. Catharsis, the name of our band played for the show. It drew over a hundred people. That was the closest I ever got to my dream music gig of playing a score for a movie. Greg, another musician friend of mine was also joining the group, the H.I.M group that is. He was a very fine woodwind player of all kinds but wasn’t in our band. He was at another level – a jazz player – we were Latin slanted folk rock – not an easy mix so we never invited him to join us and he didn’t seem interested in us either. Greg and I went to Portland to try to sell our instruments. I couldn’t believe he sold what he did – an oboe, soprano sax, an alto sax and a flute. I gave away one flute to Clara and brought my other one with me thinking I could sell it on the road. The band was not at all happy when I told them I was going off with this group. None of them felt so inclined – none were at the meeting and by the way I did not attempt to recruit anyone to join us. That was the farthest thing from my mind.

As it turned out, Ron and Judy were also ready to go. Their kids were now with their dad in Lincoln City an hour north of Newport. Greg also joined with us and so did another good friend, Rob. None of us were Christians by the way. In fact Ron and Robert were New York, Brooklyn Jews who were a few years older than I and who had been on the west coast in communes some years before we arrived there. Ron had traveled throughout India and at one point fell very ill and was nursed back to health by a village leader who wanted him to marry his daughter, like out of some Kipling movie. Rob signed away his 5 acre property to a friend which included the A frame house he built himself. He had become quite a landlord in his years in Newport/Waldport. He owned perhaps 8-9 houses in Newport that he rented out to hippies and fishermen. He sold some for next to nothing and gave away others. He too was quite taken by Bo and Peep. So together we headed for Eugene with destination thereafter unknown. Tara and I had $50 between us to donate to the cause. We had been living hand to mouth for years. It didn’t seem to bother us and it sure made it easy to leave.

The Eugene destination was a state park picnic area. There we saw a woman sitting at a folding card table in the middle of a landscaped field. All around her though at some distance from her there were people milling about. I didn’t know anyone and no one was paying attention to anyone else. Some may have been park patrons. It was strange to say the least. So we walked up to this woman and introduced ourselves. She was expecting us and simply told us to move as quickly as we could to our destination – Colorado National Monument near Fruita, a small town near Grand Junction, Colorado where we would be met by some who were already there but who were only staying for a few day, thus we needed to get their pronto. Rob had a bundle of cash from some of his house sales so he paid the way in gas and food.

Apparently the groups M.O. was to be very secretive about their whereabouts and to only stay in any one location a few days. They didn’t even give us the Eugene meeting location right away. Initially they only gave us a phone number to call and a specific time to do so. They knew that some would not take to kindly to someone’s abrupt departure. On the road I began to write to my parents about my choice. I knew calling them would do no good. They were not in approval of my choice to be so far from my New York home, living with a young women out of wedlock, no regular job or income, long hair, so on and on. Whenever I’d call I’d get fussed at because I hadn’t called sooner, though I did not have money for long distance charges which at that time were quite expensive – like 6-7 dollars a minute.

Yes for some one thing does lead to another and strong addiction may follow, but for me as I proved later, when I was ready to stop I stopped. By the time I met Bo and Peep I rarely did a hallucinogen. I had returned to smoking some pot, after nearly two years without.

As I wrote my parents it dawned on me that it may have been more than coincidence that, just that past summer I felt strongly to return to New York for a visit. Tara was opposed to the trip. After all we had begun the house and garden in our new commune endeavor with Ron, Judy and Rob. Why go back, but I felt compelled to do so, so we hitchhiked back and visited with both of our families. My younger brother at 14 years old seemed the most excited at seeing us. We got there late at night and I remember knocking on a window that just so happened was my bother’s room. He peaked out the window and was shocked to see me. That was so precious. It makes me nearly come to tears to recall it. From there Tara’s uncle who lived on Central Park West in the big apple bought us bus tickets to Florida to see Tara’s ailing grandmother. We stayed with her a few days, my first meeting her and she seemed to like me and then took the bus back to Oregon. Several months before that trip, we hitchhiked down to San Diego and saw my sister who had joined the Navy and was stationed on Coronado Island Naval Base. We met with her and it was the first time I’d seen her since she was 15.

Was it a coincidence that just months before we were to walk out of our lives in such dramatic fashion having no inkling to do anything of the sort before or did our spirit or soul or wherever we want to call it direct us in some fashion. People who have near death experiences often say they saw their life pass before them in an instant. Though my body was not threatened with destruction I did have a very strong sense that all that I was – all that I did – all somehow came together to not only prepare my mind to an acceptance of this huge step but also somehow located us where it did to be in the path of this spontaneous movement.

As with all of us, we are the sum total of our past experiences and choices thus an answer to how this all came to be as a reality we did not question can only be seen through one’s life story.

Chapter 4 – On the road as UFO Jesus Missionaries Extraordinaire

We arrived at the Colorado National Monument just as the sun was setting. Our car weaved through the narrow twisty, turny, huge rock formations. Maybe it was my imagination but it did feel intensely energetic and for the first time I was looking up and almost expecting to see a UFO. Again, I didn’t join for that type of excitement, though I later learned that some had. After all the group acted as if there was no time to waste and that we could be whisked off to this Next Level at any time. I later learned, that sense of immediacy was more the projections of the group members who had joined from the first couple meetings that took place in Los Angeles and the San Francisco Bay area than from Bo and Peep. However, the idea of “hitting the deck running” was certainly part of the modus operandi from day one. The sense of no time to waste held on for the entire 19 years of my rather intense involvement – time was always of the essence. That’s not to say there weren’t many times where time seemed to stand still. It was a mindset, a consciousness each person needed to maintain for themselves. Ti was very clear that this would require a serious sustained effort. But Bo and Peep did not know exactly when we might be picked up, nor exactly how or where. When pressed by students they said it would take place within five years, but they never claimed an absolute date or period of time.

At the first camping area at the top of the monument we were greeted by some we’d identified from the Waldport meeting who basically told us where we could lay down our sleeping bags, as we needed to wait for more to arrive. As a couple that was a difficult point as Tara and I had done a great deal of camping and would zip our sleeping bags together and “snuggle” and she, feeling a little insecure perhaps at the moment, perhaps our last moment together as a couple, after nearly being glued to each other for five years, moved closer in the sleeping bag, to which I gently moved to the other side so not to be touching. I had no interest at all in sex at that moment, which was a first in my life, not that she was seeking such either, but I didn’t even want to go to square one. Still it was difficult for both of us.

We awoke and there were a couple dozen people all around, brushing their teeth and conversing. A meeting with the Two was announced to us and we all gathered in a little amphitheater, one with stone benches which is where we saw Bo and Peep for the second time. Again they appeared in their greenish windbreakers and as was most often the case Bo spoke while Peep listened attentively. They welcomed us and acknowledged the difficulties they knew many of us experienced exiting our old world. They stated that as hard as it is to leave loved ones behind it was necessary as this process needed your total effort. They said that those left behind would received special help from our Heavenly Father and would be looked after. We had to at this point have faith they would be fine and begin to cease dwelling on the past. And regarding the “past” it was the “past” and we needed to detach from it so we wouldn’t bring it up to others or ask others about their past. They said an essential ingredient we all needed was to establish a strong connection to our Heavenly Father. To do this they said to project our thoughts way out beyond the Earth’s atmosphere into deep space – as far as we could imagine, so not to have an imposter in the Spirit World try to masquerade as our Heavenly Father. They said we could ask for accelerated growth opportunities and the strength to handle them when they appeared. They spoke on influences, discarnate being, entities that are normal in the human world but who we will need to begin to give their walking papers to. In other words, spirits that may have been our helpers in the world could not help us any longer as with their help they want what they want as well – recognition of their role – seeing your success. No influence want’s to leave the planet but they will not go without a fight. This was a big part of our overcoming process – gaining a “single” eye.

They said some 27 new members came from the Waldport meeting, but some were arriving elsewhere, where we would be moving to as well. And they began to talk about what we could anticipate next – sharing this information as there appears to be a great thirst for it right now. And they answered some questions.

They made it clear that this wasn’t a hippie group, as many of us were and that they sought to maintain high standards of cleanliness and grooming. There wasn’t any philosophical talk but they made it clear they didn’t know when the demonstration would occur – when the Two Witnessed in Chapter 11 of Revelations are killed and after 3 1/2 days rise again. They fully anticipated this event but felt they must first gather those that are looking for this “information”. The focus was on the “process” and the “information”. The “process” was the overcoming of the world process and the information was the smelling salts that set us off – that compelled us to join. I learned later that most responded as I did – compelled to learn more and to do whatever was necessarily to have more. They also told us to select new names to match our the new person we were becoming. They said we could change our name as often as we wished.

After the meeting people started grooming themselves. Tara cut off the foot long braid I had and I shaved for the first time in maybe three years. There was a little sense of loss of identity from it, as I had built some of my identity in how I looked, so it was clearly one of the first shows of determination to engage this “process”.

That day, Bo held brief informal meetings with small groups of perhaps 6 new members. What I remember most from that meeting was his gentle way, but no sense of the saccharine niceties one can often find in various spiritual circles. But that is when he said to us…”this would be the hardest thing any of you could attempt to do in your lives – to overcome all your humanness and that perhaps only one or two of you will see this through. I remember thinking… “wow, that hard…I can do it…I will do it.” I didn’t at the time understand what would be so hard but I believed in what he said. I never for a moment in his presence felt his equal. I mean, I knew we both were in human bodies but there was something about him that I knew a great deal more about perhaps anything than I did, so I was in awe of him one could say.

That same day we packed up and among the six of us received directions to join one of six organized groups that were in the Ft. Collins/Boulder/Denver area where the next round of meetings were to be held. Tara and I were assigned the Boulder group and a ride was arranged.

Arriving at the Boulder Canyon site was uneventful. People’s tents were spread out among the trees, mostly hidden. It was a rustic camp area with not even a sign I could see. I was told we were waiting for one more couple who had been visiting their cousin and his girlfriend in Corvallis, Oregon, when they all decided to attend the meeting they’d seen advertised. They all joined. The Canadian couple from Calgary, Alberta went back to Canada to tie up their lose ends and were headed back to join the group in Colorado. They arrived the next day. We didn’t do any socializing per say. There were two that seemed to be the small group leaders and they asked if we needed anything and told us in general what was going on. So people stuck to their tent area doing whatever they wanted – read, fixed food they’d brought with them and so on, but there was no time wasted either. That same day, we all combined ourselves in a couple cars as there were only about 12 in this group and were instructed to meet at Poudre River Canyon, just north of Ft. Collins a couple hours north of Boulder.

As we arrived we could see this was a big meeting as there seemed to be perhaps 40 or 50 people. All were just sitting tight conversing with those they knew already, while group leaders were going back and forth as if they had some business we knew not of. After about a half hour Bo and Peep showed up and gave a meeting. In it they explained to us that we would all be holding six meetings on the same Sunday afternoon, perhaps five days away. Boulder, Ft. Collins, North Denver and Denver proper and a couple more I just don’t recall and probably never even knew. I knew there were some things, in fact many things I didn’t need to know. I trusted I’d receive what I needed to help me with my overcoming process. Then they explained that they had little funds and wanted to outfit all the new members, many of which joined with nothing with gear for living on the road as they thought we’d be in this traveling meeting mode for a while. They also explained that part of the overcoming process was trusting the Next Level, though the representatives sent – Bo and Peep to take care of our needs. That without giving over that trust it was like holding an ace in the hole in case this didn’t work out. They said we could all walk over to a certain spot and deposit whatever we want into that spot but to hold onto legal documents like drivers license and such. But we didn’t need to hold onto any money. Each group would be provided money for some of what we needed, that is, as long as it held out. Tara and I had $50 so we deposited that. They didn’t say we needed to strip or anything or put in the pile a Rolex watch though they did say, they did not adorn themselves with any decorations. They sought to be plain Jane in appearance – not trying to stand out or feel a certain way by what we wore or hung on our ears as all those things were things to overcome any need of. To hold onto things like that meant you weren’t ready to give your all to this effort.

I learned later that some had turned in their marijuana stash and I also learned that another seeing it secretly absconded with it. It wasn’t like there were any watchdogs present. That individual didn’t stay with the group very long.

Then Bo and Peep opened their car trunk and took out sleeping bags, Coleman stoves, some cots in the back seat and some foam pads and small tents and asked who needed them, at which point some helped distribute them and anyone who still needed one was put on a list. The group leaders gathered the pile of what all the new members donated and I didn’t pay any further attention as the meeting dispersed as Bo and Peep.

Next Bo and Peep began to create partnerships. This was a most traumatic time for those who joined as couples. Tara and I were partnered with another couple, me with Dandy, the new name she chose and she with Dandy’s old partner. I had chose the name Tim. Dandy was crying a great deal. I tried to console her a bit but knew there was little I could do. She had to come to terms with it, which she shortly did. Bo and Peep began to talk about the reason for the partnerships. This “process” was an accelerated period of growth – a cocoon kind of stage. A partner becomes a mirror of what you need to overcome. They are your equal but all decisions should be made together. One shouldn’t just walk off to use the latrine without telling the other where they are going and why. Because of this close relationship it will stimulate challenging circumstances that you will need to work out between you. You are not trying to please one another. You are both seeking to please only your Heavenly Father and you should know that of your partner as well so treat them with all the respect with which you want to be treated. When you find yourselves at am impasse, you each need to withdraw from your position and ask your Heavenly Father’s guidance (not aloud). It was private for each of us to do, and you will find that a solution neither of you thought of will frequently occur to you both or just feel right, not caring who expressed it. It’s because you relinquished your need to be right and have the answers, to even tiny questions and this opened you up for a better answer than either may have initially considered. It was as Jesus said…”where two or more are gathered in my name, I am in their midst”. Because of how the numbers fell, there were occasional threesomes. Then they added that we should let any one break up these partnerships.

It was in Poudre river that we met (though no one introduced themselves or made a point to introduce one another) all the members to date. It is also there where I began to catch on to how some of the students that joined before I did thought and acted. All were very serious but not without humor, as was the case with Bo and Peep. Bo and Peep didn’t crack jokes and their subject matter was generally logistical or lesson material so was serious but they also had an amiable light vibration. They never spoke with hell fire and brimstone. The bible was not a focus but was clearly in use by whoever wanted to use one. Bo and Peep did not discourage bible study, one of the things I did with my spare time. But certain students seemed to be thinking they were the reincarnation of certain persons in the New Testament. It was thought that we were those same souls who had returned to finish our lessons as we weren’t ready then, which is why Jesus said, He (with his Father) would have to return at a later time and then speak “plainly” of the Kingdom. Plainly was like using phrases like Next Level, or Evolutionary Level Above Human, says a little more than Kingdom of Heaven, at least did to me. I thought Heaven was this castle in the clouds, or just a good part of the spirit world. I never really thought of it as being in outer space, but that is what heaven actually means – the expanse or firmament around the earth – the sky scape to included the sun and moon. I never thought about members of the Kingdom of Heaven. I thought there was angles and angles had wings so were these mystical beings, even being invisible. But Bo and Peep were speaking more plain than I’d heard before by saying there were members, in fact, older members like themselves, what a human would call a Farther and younger members – works that helped with all the many tasks in the Next Level. So Bo and Peep were kind of deflating the spirit mysticism out of the idea and bringing it into more of a practical reality focus. Yes, there was still some considerable mystery but it was far progressed from what we had before.

One member of the group seemed to think of herself as Mary, the new name she’d chose when she joined. She was in her early 50’s and it was quickly apparent she was treating all us youngins as her children. She’d have to overcome that I thought to myself, but then found it amusing and went along. Another thought of himself as John and he had taken that name. He had a very managerial business air and to me was like 3CPO from star wars though barely short the British accent. Another chose Peter, very tall, squared jaw, great smile and perfect build. It wasn’t like they were all talking about what Jesus disciple they thought they were, but their names gave them away and I didn’t doubt that they just may have been. Bo and Peep didn’t monitor our name choices, but did say, that it wasn’t exactly boastful to think of oneself as one of Jesus disciples for two reasons. It held you to what they represent to you in your head and two they didn’t’ understand enough back then to be able to make the conscious choice to overcome and leave this world. Yes, many did go to their death in belief but much of that was stimulated by what they witnessed their teacher Jesus do – forecasting it then allowing himself to be captured knowing he would be murdered, then rising again and demonstrating a new body in progress but with new characteristics that to them was magic. One can’t ultimately make the transition into the Next level with undisputable proof of the Next Level’s existence as that would be baiting the body with magic. They 2000 years ago could only see such supernatural events because they were not ready to go in that lifetime. They had to come into a new body to start without such a memory that could substitute for a large portion of what otherwise would be experientially based faith.

Bo and Peep had also rearranged the groups so Tara and I with our new partners were not in the same group. Out of sight out of mind was certainly employed as a mechanism of not slipping back into old habits and desires. Dandy and I were still in the Boulder group and at about that time, we gathered up some of our new camping gear as we were some of those without much gear and it was back to Boulder Canyon.

The next morning a small group meeting was called by our group leaders, actually called “helpers” referring to helping Bo and Peep organizationally. They were in no way superior though having that position did set them apart and give them a certain air of authority and importance. Apparently they had secured a meeting hall, in the Boulder Library and had arranged to have posters made, thus the next step was to canvas Boulder which we did. We set out with two partnerships to a car and a plan of what areas to cover. Dandy and I were let out with our stack of posters and off we went – disciples of this new movement spreading the word. It was fun and Dandy and I got along well. We put up posters wherever it suited us. We even had nourishment provided by apple trees in people’s yards that hung over into the sidewalk. We didn’t have any question about picking a couple. We felt we were working for God and had a right to a few apples. We put up posters for three days.

The Boulder Meeting was given by our two group “helpers”. There were perhaps 100 people in attendance in a small conference room. They pretty much said the same things Bo and Peep had said. By the way, I can’t recall Peep saying much of anything at that first meeting but that wasn’t necessarily a pattern we needed to follow. It was known that each member might anticipate taking a turn in giving a meeting. As in our first meeting, some stayed after the meeting to ask questions and from that meeting 4-5 new members were added to our ranks.

The next day Dandy and I went all around Boulder picking up the posters we put out. We didn’t need them. It was simply the responsible thing to do. It wasn’t my idea either. In the next day or two these new members trickled into camp. We didn’t socialize much at that camps, if at all. Chit chat was frowned upon. There were no chit chat police but if you started to chit chat the other person would respond politely or just say…we are not to engage in idle conversation. That was an instruction from Bo and Peep. I didn’t know all the things they’d told others, so Dandy and I stayed near our tent, prepared meals together, cleaned up and did a lot of reading and contemplating. There were no radios or card games. By many a so called modern day person’s standards it was boring but I can’t say the inactivity bothered me though before joining it would have.

A day or two later we were informed of a meeting with Bo and Peep to be held at Arapahoe Community College. It was primarily for all those who were joining or considering to join as a result of the six area meetings. We arrived into a large lecture hall and we were instructed to sit on the floor in front of Bo and Peep to act as a buffer, though facing Bo and Peep. Apparently this was also a public meeting so had a mix. I remembers sitting there and for the first time in my life felt like the disciple of a guru. I was so, so proud to be counted as their student. It was the happiest I can say I’d ever felt. A buffer was someone in this context that was positive minded about Bo and Peep so in group formed a shield of sorts against the negativity Bo and Peep anticipated and felt directed at them at meetings they’d already given.

In a sense they made more enemies than allies because there was no existing group that was claiming to be leaving the planet with their bodies as one’s highest human aspiration. Therefore when anyone heard this, that we were not aspiring to spiritual enlightenment or nirvana, yet were not of the “say you are saved and by your belief your sins are forgiven and you will sit at God’s right hand and that all paths human are fine to get to the top of the mountain, but that there is only one way off – when a member of the next level incarnates to show you the way, we more or less intimidated or challenged others views as the ultimate pathway. And mix that with talk of UFO’s and people actually walking out the doors of their lives and wammo, we were becoming what was seen as a dangerous cult. Actually little did we know, there were investigators on our trail from Newport, Oregon. The word was out that this UFO Cult had somehow convinced people to give all away in exchange for a ride on a UFO to another world. Articles were starting to show up in local papers from Los Angeles where it began that April to San Francisco where one meeting was at Stanford College and big time in little Newport, Oregon where we’d come from and had that confrontation with the police. Bo and Peep did have this sense so knew moving quickly to do what they had started was a necessity.

To make matter worse, apparently when Bo and Peep were giving the Denver proper meeting, two FBI officers asked some of Bo and Peep’s helpers (they traveled with three student partnerships) if they could have a word with them after the meeting. When Bo and Peep were told this, rather than meet with the FBI, not at the time knowing what was on their mind, decided to go out the back door, hop in a car and skidoo. They had both been in jail before on circumstantial charges and now more than ever didn’t want to give anyone that opportunity. Apparently the FBI was interested in the group because of the UFO still on the posters. It was right in the middle of a large amount of cattle mutilation activity. At the sightings of these cattle mutilations frequently ranchers said they saw and bright light in the field or otherwise a UFO. The nature of the mutilations was very strange indeed, surgical cutting out of reproductive and milk giving organs, no sign of blood, precision cuts and no sign of footsteps or of an aircraft. And this pattern was being repeated all over Colorado. So this new “cult” was suspected and they couldn’t have been further from the source of such occurrences, though we weren’t vegan yet either.

The next day Bo and Peep called another group meeting to include new members. To my surprise it was in a meeting room in the Denver Court house of all places. I thought that so odd. In this meeting were told of our next destination – Chicago over a thousand miles away and our getting there was to be a new experience for many of us – as there wasn’t enough funds to get us all there so we’d have to “test” our way there. “Testing” meant, going to those who say they are Christians who therefore technically should give to whoever asks of them and simply asking for our daily needs which in this case entailed gasoline and food. We could sleep in our sleeping bags on the side of the road or in the car if need be. We were not to beg. We were working for our Heavenly Father’s Kingdom and a worker is deserving of their daily bread. If they did not help us, we were to have no ill will to them – just move on. If they opened their doors to us, then give freely of what we have.

So the six small groups were dissolved and we were all instructed to meet at Cherry Creek Camp near Denver proper to organize for the trip. This was special for me as we were there for two days and Bo and Peep had been staying there while they were in this area with us. I saw that they too lived in a tent and didn’t seem to have anything more than us. I peeked in to their tent as I passed by and it looked very neat – a cot with a sleeping bag on each side of the tent and a couple folding chairs and a folding table – that was about it. While camping there we were told to keep our ears and eyes open as one never knew when Bo and Peep would walk around to mingle a bit to answer questions informally and sure enough they did and a crowd would quickly gather as individuals popped their heads out of their tents to be a part of. And this is where I got to hear more from Peep. In meetings she was near silent but in this setting she was quite amiable, conversational, humorous and pleasant.

We were organized into cars, two couples to a car. Dandy and I with Jan and her partner neither of which I knew yet. We were given about a tanks worth of gas, whatever food we already had as there was no central food distribution and instructions to meet at a camping area within the Chain of Lakes State park, just north of Chicago. We got on the road. Bo and Peep had instructed us to come into a town and ask our Heavenly Father to lead us to whoever might be receptive of the information we had to share. We were starting to develop our “feelers” they said, thinking of our solar plexus area as being key to it’s function. During travel time we were mostly expected to be “tuning in” to the Next Level – seeking accelerated growth and ways of service while not allowing our consciousness to dwell in the past and certainly not talk about the past. So there wasn’t a great deal of conversation. In fact mostly none except when we came to a decision point – which way to turn on the highway. We took turns as partnerships tuning into where to go in each town. We didn’t stop in each town, only those that were in proximity with the time of our needs for food and/or gasoline.

I clearly remember when it was our turn to seek help for our needs. Dandy wanted me to go first, but we together walked up to a Catholic church rectory door and knocked. I was nervous. I did not want to do it. I did not want to beg however we explained it. In fact there was only one time, and in my recent past when I asked a church for such help and that was before joining when Tara and I were out of money traveling to Lake Havasu City, Arizona looking for work. We went to my mother’s condo there as a place to stay from which we thought we could get work. It was 110 degrees in the shade I recall and we were staying in a condo that had no facilities turned on. But on the way, a church in Needles, Arizona helped us with some food to get further down the road.

It’s funny how I see this approach to this door so dramatically now. The door seemed huge – a big brown ornate looking wooden door with a huge ring type knocker that I used. No one came and so I started to walk back sheepishly somewhat glad no one was home, but then the other couple from a little distance egged me on to go and knock again which I did. The door opened and I said what I’d somewhat practiced… “We are in the area doing work for our Heavenly Father, sharing new information we have come upon and have some needs for food and gasoline – can you help us? He said, No! and shut the door and that was that. But I broke the ice. I had never proselytized or preached much of anything. When I was a kid I sold candy outside the bank and went door to door in my neighborhood getting people to sign up for my Christmas card club, but never had asked someone for a handout claiming to be heavenly messenger. It did feel natural and right, though scary. The next door I knocked on handed me a $20 bill – they said nothing and asked nothing and though it didn’t fill the tank and our bellies it was enough to get to the next town. In the evening we stopped on the side of the highway and found a decent spot to put sleeping bags and rested, got up, washed up and were on our way once more. It wasn’t more than another day until we arrived at our destination somewhat proud that we’d accomplished our first mission.

As people were arriving, those assigned to greet us assigned us an area in which to set up our tents. This was my first sense of being a part of this group. There was a slight euphoria in the air as people went about their chores and began to recognize faces they’d now seen a time or two before, all knowing we had chosen the same dedicated endeavor that we believed stood apart from anything else we’d done before. Most had been a part of this or that spiritual organization or pursuit or practice and the numbers were mixed male and female with a few 16 yr olds and a few in their 50’s. Most were in their late 20’s to early 30’s. There were now about 70 members.

Our first task was to scope out Chicago for meeting locations so cars were organized to go into Chicago to attend events where the participants might have interest in our information. Apparently Chicago had a large sector of spiritualists and people interested in all manner of the supernatural. The group I was with attended a meeting about psychic phenomena and asked questions with the intention of discovering what the teacher thought about UFO’s and such. There was interest and we stayed after and spoke to the teacher of the class about our new effort. We were in the Chicago area for 4-5 days and it was getting harder and harder to sustain ourselves financially as we all used the same method of largely “testing” Christians for our needs and we didn’t go to the same place twice.

One morning we were told not to go out looking for help. A type of emergency meeting was called and Bo and Peep showed up. In it they told us our group had been infiltrated by two individuals, later we knew as Robert Balch and David Taylor. They were Oregon state students who joined as a way of doing their college thesis and they’d been with us for several weeks studying the phenomena. The group was in the news by then as the UFO cult led by this mysterious middle aged couple. But as it turned out a few days earlier Walter Cronkite had broke the story with the human identity of the Two as Bonnie Lu Trousdale Nettles and Marshall Herf Applewhite both from Texas. Since this had hit the national media and there was a hunt for them as the reason people were leaving homes and families behind to “catch a ride on a UFO” the media hyped and since there were impostors within our ranks, the teachers were in jeopardy of being apprehended and that would break up this group that was loose knit to begin with.

Bo and Peep had been in a hotel in Las Vegas when the Cronkite story hit and felt like they didn’t want to leave the room for fear of being apprehended. They didn’t feel like it was the right time for the demonstration as they predicted would occur according to Chapter 11 of the Book of Revelations re: the Two Witnesses. So while we were all arriving in Chicago and getting settled and scoping out the town for meeting locations and interests they were contemplating their next step. It was interesting looking back at how they were “shot down” from their mysterious position as Members from the Kingdom of God and how that occurred while they were hold up in Las Vegas, a city that like none other in the US might be considered akin to Sodom and Gomorrah (a city filled with all manner of corrupt behaviors) again as stated in the Revelation. Bo and Peep did not think of this until months later when it they realized the demonstration as they first thought could occur was not going to. In any case, shot down by the press saying they were frauds took them 3 1/2 days to recover and formulate a new strategy as they could not be seen in public now, not with the picture posted all over TV making them to be dangerous people knappers.

Walking around camp I recall wondering who might be the imposter. I can’t say I saw it all with the seriousness Bo and Peep did but I was certainly naïve as to how authorities could have pounced down on all of us at any moment.

So when Bo and Peep came into the camp, they were more secretive than I’d ever seen them and this time Peep spoke very quietly in case there were spies in bushes and there very well could have been. They gave us the overview of what was going on in the media and about the infiltrators and how they believe to know who they were and they were not in the camp. I suppose they just didn’t know what other surprised could be lurking in our midst because all they said they could do was scatter. The quickly assigned groups with about three cars each and had a separate huddle with those they knew they could trust, who had been with them for six months or so by then. No one else in a group would know where any group was going. They had a way for group members to stay in touch with Bo and Peep’s group of six plus themselves – I guess what would have been considered the core group. We would have a particular hotel chain that had hotels everywhere and a specific time each day when one could try to leave or pickup a message for a particular name. In this way someone knowing this scheme could call the Holiday Inn in San Francisco where a group was planning to go next and leave a message for Peter Childs, saying he will be checking in later. Then Peter Childs would call the hotel for any messages and it was a free message service. They would know that they could call again or meet in person at the hotel the next day at the same time and make contact. It worked well, but I was not privy to this plan until much later in my membership.

We packed up our camp as quickly as possible. Time again was of the essence as we didn’t know if authorities would be headed up our way and I later learned they were right behind us, even a couple hours behind us. This was till October and as the groups numbers increased however seemingly small, each new members was by some in their family a missing person who was somehow lured against their will to have some pie in the sky.

Next thing I knew we were in a car with 4 others headed south and I was driving. Apparently Bo and Peep handed each group leader partnership some funds to get us far enough out of the Chicago area so we weren’t slowed too much by seeking gasoline help. So we didn’t stop until we got to Oklahoma, just east of Tulsa where there were a bunch of large lakes and campgrounds where we camped and met up with several other groups but did not know the whereabouts of Bo and Peep.

Our group leaders did not have instructions past this point so we waited a couple days. Then we got word that our group would head to Phoenix to see if there would be receptivity for a meeting. We had an agreed upon campground to meet at near Phoenix. Apparently two groups would work together on the area. It was quite handy that Bo and Peep had spent literally years on the road in these areas before they ended up giving that Los Angeles meeting that began the group. They knew every place we could camp for free and with little hassle and we took advantage of those instructions when we could get them.

But trying to organize the Phoenix meeting was the beginning of a great deal of strangeness that would plaque the overall movement for months to come. People began question the leadership of those assigned by Bo and Peep to be our “helpers” or “contact people” to Bo and Peep and/or their helpers. These helpers were no anything special in terms of their management abilities which is what probably drew the most criticism. We were all very green at all this. None of us were of the ilk of a follower of anyone. Most of us were drop outs from society, business and the world to a large degree. And most were thick headed and not exactly polished diplomats. But it only took one or two to spoil the soup but it wasn’t really spoiling it – it was a response to the asking we’d all be instructed to do to “have accelerated growth” – well it was being dished out big time now.

Even still we managed to agree to look for a room and media support for poster donations and of course there were our daily needs to include gasoline. I remember living off of donuts thrown out by Dunkin Donuts that were readily available daily in the dumpster and as they didn’t have much really gross trash it was not contaminated. Later when Bo and Peep heard some were doing this they felt we’d taken the easy way out and that it was beneath us. Dandy and I would walk along the avenue where there were growing large date palms and we could easily find nice dates that had fallen when birds plucked at some loosening others. We lived on these dates for days. Well, though we learned where we could get great showers at the University of Phoenix by just walking in like we were students and showering. As it turned out the other group secured a free meeting room in Prescott, Arizona a hour to the north of Phoenix so we all migrated to that area to publicize it. It was our way to only give at most a week lead time to a meeting. Knowledge of who were even though it had made the national news was still not spread everywhere to all the small towns and not everyone watched the national news and the story though it was fairly big for a while didn’t dominate the entire media. However we didn’t want to push it and there was also the consideration that we were living off of the donations of the town and essentially the churches in each town. There was only so many donations one could find and we often visited a church where other members had just visited before us. Asking for help, though it became routine was never fun. It was always drudgery in the sense that it would have been easier to work, and at times did offer to do jobs to pay our way. However, the fact was, of course as we saw it was that we did have a job – to spread the word that representatives from the real physical Level that Jesus came from were here physically to share how that kingdom may at this time be entered, but essentially walking out the door of you life to join our effort to include overcoming all your human desires and characteristics that would in process be creating a new body within your physical one. And that at the completion we would be picked up by a UFO, not needing to experience death – gaining eternal life in a new world, but not the spirit world.

It’s funny looking back on these words and actually understanding them more fully. Death really meant what Jesus referred to as the “second” death. The new body we were creating was in actuality our soul – what was being filled more and more with Next Level mind stuff that at some point could be “viable” – able to transit the human kingdom – becoming the “celestial body” not made of the same flesh stuff the flesh body is made of yet still of some physical nature.

In any case the Prescott meeting was a good one. Somewhere around eight new members came from it and in this case Bo and Peep were nowhere to be found. We were out of touch with them at this point. We continued the pattern of having follow up contacts who stayed behind to help new members exit their old lives. Meanwhile the groups went on to our next prospective meeting town – Sante Fe, New Mexico. We camped in the black mountains and this town in particular was both very receptive to our presence and our message but for some very committed to forms of spirituality that would find our message of “the only way off the mountain top” offensive because that in a way was saying we were the top dogs, but the plain truth is better seen by eliminating all spiritual inference. The point was that these members from a world outside the Earth were opening the door for a brief time to any humans who might want to apply for membership in their world. It wasn’t saying they were top dog, though if that group were the creators of the entire planet and even our very existence, however that evolved in mind and body in conjunction with the direction offered by members from that other world, then I guess they would be a rung up the totem pole. Jesus said it this way that even the least in the Kingdom of Heaven (amidst the firmament outside the expanse of the Earth) is greater than the greatest human on Earth (at the time referring to John the Baptist).

The Sante Fe meeting was given by my old friend Ron from Newport and his partner. It was an intense meeting and about a half dozen new members came from it. Because of the new members and the need for cars I finally sold my silver flute I’d been carrying around (and had never again played). I got $90 for it and with the money Dandy and I bought a car that did run but that’s about it. We went ahead to the next meeting location – Berkley, California where two other groups besides our two were converging.

It was nearing Halloween – October 31 and as a prank a book store in Berkeley announced that the UFO Two as they were now called would be showing up to give a meeting on Halloween. We heard the rumor and so showed up wondering who was going to claim to be Bo and Peep. No one showed up and it was just a silly confusing scene as there were people interested in the message of the “UFO Two”, but we took care of any of those and pointed them to the real meeting we were organizing in a large park in Berkley. A lot of press showed up, but also parents of those who joined, spouses of those who joined all looking for their loved ones. In some cases they were found and emotions ran high but none were dissuaded. I ran into Tara there and it was a little awkward. We glanced at one another but did not make any effort to have further contact. Actually I ran into her very briefly at another time and it was strange but we kept our focus on our tasks and not on each other.

We stayed in the house of a would be new member and it was one strange scene as people knew who we were but at the same time didn’t know what to make of us. We like celebrities to keep some distance from I guess. After the Berkley meeting several groups merged in the forest near Santa Rosa. There were many new members that had never met Bo and Peep. Being somewhat a veteran by now I recall speaking nightly around the campground repeating everything I’d heard Bo and Peep say or do.

Plus there were members there that I had never met who were on the road traveling spreading the message while Bo and Peep were headed up to Waldport. One person’s name was Seymour. He had some ideas of going east but didn’t want to do it himself, but I liked the idea being from the east and feeling a calling to take on a difficult task to help bring the message there as it seemed apparent the west coast was becoming saturated. Dandy wasn’t enthralled by the idea but was willing. So we had a pow wow and agreed to split into two. We numbered perhaps 50 at this camp. Some would need to hold back while new members trickled in. Seymour wanted to head north again, eventually heading up to Canada. My group, not “mine” but one in which I was taking more of a leadership role would head to Boston.

Out of the recent California meetings came a bunch of new members that in some ways made former disciples look tame minded. One person called himself Lightborn and he was apparently loosely affiliated with Ruth Gordon’s group and the Space Brotherhood, a group of alleged aliens that were very military in style and who were like a Starfleet command as a part of a grander union of space aliens though they acted and looked very much like humans. Another individual took the name John the Baptist – a big guy. They were to travel to meet us in Boston as well.

Well the car we’d bought for $90 lasted for about that many miles – collapsed and Dandy and I were given a little Mazda a new member from Sante Fe had brought into the organization. We drove it cross country stopping alone the way to ask for our daily needs and most importantly spreading the word as we went. There were many a preacher I engaged in debate. More and more I studied what Jesus had said in the gospels and found his words more and more clearly supportive of the same effort in which we were engaged so frankly could shoot down any arguments to the contrary. In fact in many cases after some discussion we were asked to leave and without help as we were thought to be inspired by the devil. I really did not care whether we got help if the other had a problem with the message we were wielding. It was clear to me that we were certainly not saying or doing anything against Jesus. Those we encountered were the ones most insistent in our use of their terminology to describe their faith that by not subscribing to indicated to them that we were not of their ilk and rightly so – we were not. All this stuff about Jesus dying for our sins so that any talk of works (effort) was thought of as somehow “earning” our salvation in the face of what Jesus was to have given us. Where did Jesus exemplify that he did it all for us, anymore than a teacher of math can do your own math problem and expect you to gain the benefit from it. The teacher can show you the “way” but they can never do it for you as they know experience is the only real teacher. This logic was so clear to me and I learned to see it in so many ways backed by scripture because frankly I’d taken the leap of faith to leave it all behind as Jesus required of his students and the Bo and Peep were requiring now while those in churches had not taken such a step thus would not be the beneficiary of the relationship such leap of faith spawned with one’s Heavenly Father. This was not to say I sat in judgment of anyone. If they didn’t answer the call that was not my business and I said that to many, that they had their own relationship to God and I was not one to say what that is for them, however when the shepherd’s voice is heard the sheep from that fold need to respond or else be left to fend for themselves in a world of wolves often in sheep’s clothing to steal your very soul. It came to timing. We were saying the timing for what Jesus had preached he would return to do – gather up the believers was “at hand”. It wasn’t for everyone and belief was nothing without action. One doesn’t believe in something if they are not willing to support it and the degree of that belief has to do with the degree of support and of course the cares of the world do weight heavy upon us all in how to apply that belief to action. It just so happen for me, I was more or less free of worldly attachments or for whatever reason was touched in such a way that what I considered myself attached to, my common law wife, my budding music career, my house construction and communal endeavors paled in comparison to this magnificent plain sense about what otherwise was until then still superstition and here say and frankly near beyond belief. What Bo and Peep brought seemed so darn tangible – it was well worth “selling all I had” to by one pearl of great price, one of the countless examples that Jesus gave as to what the Kingdom of Heaven (or call to it) would be worth to us.

It took us about a week to get to the Braintree area south of Boston where we’d agreed to look for one another and we immediately bumped into others from out group who had also just arrived. Then there were more and more and then we ran into another group who had heard some were tackling the east coast so also felt led to do so, so set out and in fact joined us as well. So we had several dozen members in the area coordinating our efforts and wow was that indeed an effort. Dandy and I located a library room that was large enough in Worchester, MA and agreed we would speak at the meeting having found it and I was chomping at the bit to get my feet wet. I was frightened at the idea but felt it was time to dive in. I’d been practicing my spiel for weeks.

As we began to advertise our meeting that in this case we made over a week and half away – being we wanted to do a good job to poster all over the Boston area, we went to every health food store, new age head shop, library, music venue, book store and spiritual center. We sought radio ads, did interviews with various newspapers to get free advertising and of course visited every church that existed. There were challenges at every turn though as within the group there were always a one or more that no matter what the decision, they saw it differently and could not stand to not be heard and heeded. I think they also did not want to feel led. At one point at a park we were all meeting inside a tennis court, all twenty something of us and this one member could not come to consensus on the plans, until I just said…if you don’t like it just leave… which I felt bad about saying as the individual seemed to have good intentions but was seeming to be used to repeatedly cause us all delay and discord. I apologized to him later but it wasn’t the end of our difficulties together.

The meeting in Worchester was about to begin. Dandy and I found a silent place to go “tune in”. I was going to begin talking. I was nervous for sure. I was making what I saw as a major spiritual announcement to this East Coast metro-plex. The library room was filled to capacity, certainly over 200 people. We walked in, sat down and took a moment to “tune in” asking that our Heavenly Father use us and began to say…”There is a light from the distant Heaven’s that has come upon the Earth at this time”. I literally felt engulfed in that light – removed from reality and anyone’s response, hardly aware of what I was saying and certainly having no plan memorized or noted before me. I looked over at Dandy and could see she was energized as high as a kite. She said nothing but I knew the energy was coming through both of us and it was not of our origin. After speaking for perhaps ten minutes we began to take questions and there were a bunch, many of which were from Christians but from other religious orders as well. We clarified immediately that we were students of the Two, the ones the press spoke of as the UFO Two. Maybe 40 minutes into the start it ended and some stayed after to ask more questions. Four or five wanted to know more and we answered all their questions. One wanted to join and we met up with her the next day but she ended up changing her mind. It was far different than the response in the western states. Bo and Peep felt that most that were seriously seeking found their way west, not all mind you but most.

We gathered our members and had a pow wow and decided to head north to Montpelier to put on our next meeting. Before we left Massachusetts our little car died on the side of the road. Some police happened by and said we couldn’t leave it there. We explained that we had no money and were working for our Heavenly Father’s Kingdom. He took us to the station and arranged for a tow of the car which he gave us the bill for but decided not to hold us further so we hitchhiked from there.

When we got to Montpelier, we ran into another group. Apparently three of our groups had headed to the northeast. They were also short cars but one had a Volkswagen van so we piled in and traveled together looking for the help we needed and scoping out the meeting possibilities. Food was a little scarce then. We lived mostly on canned corn and peas donated to us from food pantries. We didn’t have a stove then, so we’d eat it cold and speaking of cold, the weather was getting pretty cool. It was into November and we’d sleep out in the open on the ground wherever we could without getting arrested. One morning I awoke with a inch of snow on my sleeping bag and frozen toes. As luck will have it we met a gentleman that loved what we had to say so invited the entire group to stay at his house where he also lived with his family, to include a couple kids and a few of his relatives. We gave them a mini meeting and they were as hospitable as could be.

We were examining a meeting room in a local church, but they didn’t know exactly who we were and we didn’t always blurt out our more controversial views or ways of expression of them – yes at times it seemed too blatant unless we were asked. I remember how that became a point of contention with Lightborn and John the Baptist. When we’d ask for help and state our business as Serving our Heavenly Father by bringing new updated information about the Kingdom, if someone was not inquisitive as to what that exactly meant – what “new” information or what “update” then we didn’t force it down anyone’s throat. The testing that we were doing was not setting us up as anyone’s judge. It just demonstrated to the Father in Heaven what people were made of as Jesus said to give to whoever asked of you and that by giving to the least of these you are giving to him. Even still I never felt like…one person passed or failed. It just wasn’t my job. My job was to distribute the information and if those in Christian organizations were working for the same ones we thought of as Jesus and His Father – the Kingdom of the one true God the creator of our world and even life then why wouldn’t they want to help us and why wouldn’t we want to receive the help from them. Did our terminology mean so, so much? Well, yes it did and no it did not. For some, they wanted to help us and did so without question. For others they wanted to know all about us first, some to scope us out as legitimate or not and for others because they really were interested in what we were sharing. Some when they heard our spiel that I never held back on when they asked (and I didn’t require them to ask a whole lot) they were troubled by it. I never enjoyed that. Some cried and some I cried with not necessarily knowing why. Some got very angry and demanded we leave. Some through money at us in which case I refused to take it, though I always kept in mind that we needed to shake the dust off our feet as Jesus had instructed his disciples when he sent the 70 out doing much the same mission as we were attempting. In one case a Catholic priest gave us $20 and we said very little to him, sometimes have 4 to 6 of us approach at once asking. When we got to the car Lightborn and John the Baptist wanted to go give him a statement as he did not ask much and yet we felt his love for God. Perhaps I was too sheepish – not wanting to blow his mind or make it seem like we presented to him only what we thought he would be okay to hear to get the money when we really had all this weird to his ears stuff to share that understanding it might have caused him great grief of thinking we were charlatans after all.

The contention within the group was getting worse and worse. It got to the point that these folks were trying to break up Dandy and my partnership saying we’d been together too long and needed more lessons with others – we were too attached to each other. These folks had not even met Bo and Peep and were resentful of the strength in our partnership that Bo and Peep had formed and even warned us against breaking needlessly. Dandy and I had little to no attachment to one another. Yes, we did work well together and yes did rely on one another for strength and were friends but it was clear in my mind that I was not interested at all in another human relationship. There were brief moments of time when I tuned into her femininity, but I quickly turned my attention away and didn’t have much trouble doing so, especially helped by my sense that personally she really didn’t like me and I knew for a fact was still grieving the separation from the guy she did love, who was still by the way partnered with Tara.

But one of the indicators of whether we would do a meeting in a town was whether there were people interested in what we had to share and together with whether we were receiving the help we needed, be it food, gas a meeting room and posters. It seemed like we had far more resistance in this town so we decided to cancel. And it was getting very cold so decided we’d all go our own ways with the cars we had. Lacking our own car to use, we ended up traveling south with Lightborn and John the Baptist driving this old Camaro I think Lightborn had joined with. It wasn’t more than a couple hours down the road that Dandy and I could no longer stand being with these two guys, so we asked them to just let us off, which they did and we from that point on were on our own with only our thumbs to travel on.

So we decided first order of business was to get out of the cold and it didn’t get warmer until, well actually we still froze our butts off in Houston, Texas about a week later where they were having unseasonably cold temperatures with highs at night in the 40’s. We didn’t have winter clothing but stopped by salvation army and churches and asked for help with clothing so had some sweaters and such. As it turned out Dandy had an old friend who lived in Houston so we looked him up. He was actually a close friend of her X-boyfriend – Michael F. It was great having a warm dry place to hang our hat for a few days. I remember loving listening to the grateful dead tapes though at the same time I was guarded not to get too carried away with it. We naturally did a lot of talking and it was emotional for Dandy to be there again recalling her relationship with Michael. Detaching from the past is not easier when confronted with it. Another interesting situation came up. These folks we were visiting had some friends over. As it turned out the women in her late 40’s I’d say, said she had dated Marshall, who was known to me as Bo of Bo and Peep, my teachers. Before becoming Bo, Marshall was quite well known in Houston high society. He knew people like Farah Faucet and as he worked as the music director of a mega-church in downtown Houston that was directly across the street from where Dan Rather worked for CBS, he would often eat lunch with Dan. In any case she didn’t elaborate much on Marshall except to say he had wandering hands and I presume a healthy sexual appetite when they were together. I remember hearing that and not really caring. I didn’t have some idea that this fellow had no life before he had awakened to the role of Two Witnesses – Bo. I didn’t know much of Bo and Peeps past except what I’d read in newspapers. We’d been detached from the group for several months by then. It was December. To get out of the weather and to relax Dandy and I would seek out libraries along our journey and I’d read newspapers for any news of the group and I’d study whatever I could find related to the bible, mostly gravitating to the pseudopigraphia and the Nag Hamadi library and whatever was published about the Dead Sea Scrolls.

At this juncture we decided to head east so along the gulf coast we did continue to hitchhike. I remember one fellow picking us up, getting talking a bit but not in particular about the group and before I knew it the guy was offering me a job managing one of his factories and he was dead serious. We were clean cut and obviously not encumbered by substance use or abuse and convicted to our spiritual journey so he thought I would make a great manager. I had to refuse saying, I had a job but that I was honored that he would offer it. It was right after that that we stopped at a shelter for the night. Shelters were not a regular stop at all in our travels. We had few regular stops. We didn’t like shelters as they often separated the men from the women and it was part of our instruction to stay together which we tried to comply with but occasionally we made an exception. We didn’t think Bo and Peep would find fault with our choices but then we didn’t have a way to check with them except in our minds. As it turned out, posted right outside the shelter was a poster advertising a meeting in Panama City the very next day at a local library and it was the same information we were sharing. It blew our minds to see this. We showed up at the meeting and sat in the audience to kind of check them out – see what they were going to say and whether we recognized them. We didn’t recognize them and it was the same information alright. During question and answer period one person asked if they were the same group from Waldport, Oregon who left all behind to catch a ride on the UFO. They said they were not those folks but that it was the same group. Dandy and I could not restrain ourselves so we jumped up and said…we were some of those who were at that Waldport meeting and left all behind to follow Bo and Peep. We pleasantly shocked the speakers and the audience and they invited us to help complete the meeting which we did. One of those was named Steel and perhaps Jeremy. They had joined during a St. Louis meeting another group gave. They were not connected to any group either but knew more of their whereabouts. A huge meeting that got a lot of press was held in Biloxi, Mississippi.

Somewhat joyful to have made such connection we decided to work together, but they had a car and we did not and their car was a two seated sports car so we agreed to meet in Brownsville, Texas to see about holding a meeting there. They were also interested in warmth.

In a day we made it to Corpus Christi, Texas. Dandy was putting her sleeping bag down on the beach. We’d received help with food from a local church but no lodging. I laid my sleeping bag down perhaps 10 yards from hers and as it was way past sunset and was quiet dark was looking up into the heavens as I frequently did and talked to God when to my surprise I saw a huge ball of bright light say the size of an 1/8th of a full moon but brighter coming out from the North at about a 45 degree angle over the gulf and sped in the course of 2-3 seconds out of sight to the south at about the same angle. But that was not all. About half way in it’s path, putting it just about right above me but at perhaps a 60 degree angle it did an abrupt 90 degree turn facing down to my vantage point and seemingly without a speed change, traveled less than 1/2 second I guess but as clearly distinguishable amount before doing another 90 degree turn to keep it headed south as it first started out but as if it had changed latitude lines.

I shouted out immediately…”Did you see that…!!!” and Dandy looked up but it was gone. I immediately wondered if I felt what I thought was an intelligent presence with or in it and I believe I did though can’t put my finger on it further. I guess I felt like it was for me for some reason.

The next day we arrived in Brownsville, got help with food and found a meeting room for free, got some posters donated to advertise the meeting and rendezvoused with Steel and Jermy who helped us advertise the meeting to be held 3 or 4 days later. It was a small town. We didn’t think we needed a huge PR job. The four of us gave the meeting together and perhaps 20 people showed up and no one was interested to join us. We decided we would be holding them back too much to try to stick together further so we said our farewells and parted company.

That’s when I got it into my thick head that we were restricting our service to our Heavenly Father if we were too concerned about the winter, staying away from it. Dandy was not in objection so we decided to head north. About three days later we arrived in Madison, Wisconsin and yes it was cold. We found open churches to sleep in or shelters. But Madison did not seem to open up to our staying a while to try to do a meeting so we headed southeast into Kentucky, then all the way back west into Colorado. We were in the deep snows always being picked up and taken into people’s homes for some warm food and a dry place to sleep, or a minister of a church would put us up in a hotel. I recall sitting at the dinner table with a minister and his wife and their two kids who themselves asked us lots of questions to include…were we married. I explained that we were married to God. We’d get meal tickets for restaurants and at other times if no one was around to ask, we’d walk into a town find an open church door, go into the pantry and eat and even cook whatever was there and clean it up and leave a note of thanks. One time we were surprised by a deacon and his assistant and a large conversation ensued. Another time we were ordered to leave their premises. We spoke to many people in cars and to others in hotel lobbies – even gave impromptu meetings when the interest seemed apparent. It was exciting. It was challenging. If we had no place to stay and were too far from a town we’d just keep our thumb out as staying active kept us from freezing but we never felt our health threatened. We were well taken care of and met lots of great people. We had many run in’s with the law. They didn’t particularly like our modus operandi. One time in Tennessee they took us to the station. We each had largish backpacks and they dumped them out and found nothing as we did no drugs. I was a bit tiffed at them. So they took Dandy and locked her up and I complained and told them I was working for God and that they were messing with the wrong folks. They let her go but really frightened her as that was the first time Dandy and I were in physical contact when she ran into my arms for a hug while crying. We put our backpacks back together again and they took us to the border of the town and ordered us to stay out of their town. Some towns gave transients who were looking for help the big run around. It was not infrequently that many of the churches because of the volume of transients looking for help organized a fund to help folks but that they administered through the police department. That looks good logistically as then they could have the police check them out, not a very Jesus think to do, someone who forgave the thief and prostitute. Jesus wasn’t much of a mixer with the state. He said pay your taxes if you use Caesars money system. He also said agree with your adversary while you are in the way with them or else they will take you to the judge and from the judge to the prison where you will have to pay a great price. Many humans think they own all this land and have the right to run people off the roads and harass them if they are living outside their laws yet hurting no one, so if we need to live with this system as it would be hard or impossible to travel without being within the system, then we need to seek to “agree with this adversary to God’s law’s” so not to find ourselves punished for non-compliance with man’s laws however abhorred by God.

We continued to crisscross the mid west, town to town on the small roads. One particularly notable event occurred in Liberal, Kansas. When we got to town we found a church that without a question gave us a hotel for a week and a meal ticket for several meals a day for a week. We looked at one another and said, this is some reception. We have to organized a meeting here. We quickly found a library meeting room from free and got someone to donate 100 posters. Then we marched into the local newspaper office and asked to be interviewed. We told them about the Two Witnesses, Bo and Peep and all and the reporter in her 40’s or so took wild notes and was quite smitten with us to a point that I know we were about the weirdest things she’d seen cross her desk. But they agreed to run the story before the meeting. The article was printed front page with our pictures the day before the meeting but they got one thing wrong…They said we were claiming to be these Two Witnesses that were expecting to be killed and rise again after 3 1/2 days. When Dandy and I saw this we both kind of got scared. What if some crazed Christian thought this was their claim to fame to do in these antichrists. Then we could be putting out lives on the line by giving this meeting. We decided such would be a longshot and personally I was willing to give my life, even expected it to some degree. We agreed to announce at the meeting first thing that the paper got it wrong, that we weren’t the two, we were their disciples. Nearly 100 people showed up in this tiny town to hear our meeting and they were a good crowd though there were some Christian hecklers. So the meeting went well though no one wanted to join us and I was not disappointed by that. I was not looking for followers really, just wanted to do my job to see if there are any.

One night I recall being just west of Little Rock, Arkansas, in a camping area. It was already May. We’d been traveling like this for 4 months and overall since September when we joined. I was increasingly frustrated and felt all alone. Dandy had had some doubts she expressed and told her I’d help her with whatever she wanted to do. I assured her I could go it alone, that it wasn’t my preference but I could manage. She didn’t want to quit yet though. We had grown close and she did feel connected to Bo and Peep as I did so pressing on was our only option. I remember though looking into a clear nights sky and asking what more there was I could do and asked for help to know the way. The next day we hitched into Oklahoma City and sought the local library only to see one of those infamous UFO posters advertising a meeting a few days away at the library itself. We were elated and attended the meeting and it was being given by none other than Bo and Peep themselves with students at their sides. They looked at us and knew us though we’d hardly been seen by them before. We were reunited and it felt so, so good.

Apparently the groups were quite organized again and were still putting on meetings though attendance was low. After the meeting Bo and Peep spoke to us – congratulated our tenacity and assigned us groups to hook up with. We headed up to Indiana where our group was located. A new member from the Oklahoma City meeting provided us with a car she no longer needed so we drove ourselves.

One thing I noticed that was odd about the group leaders of the group where we were assigned is that the female of the partnership was pregnant – very, very pregnant. As it turned out she was impregnated days before she joined and didn’t know it. She had arranged to deliver the baby to a midwife and a family wanted to take the child as their own so this way she would never have so face the baby and the baby would have a loving family to care for it’s needs. While I was with this group she did leave to have the baby and she returned and all went well.

The meetings were winding down. Low attendance and enthusiasm made us feel they were played out and Peep felt that too. We started staying in our campgrounds more, working with new members, doing chores and such. We received a lot of communication from Bo and Peep that were given in such a way to encourage better grooming as well as behaviors. One time we were instructed to communicate to anyone if they have a particular problem with them. Maybe this was a big mistake but I told one female classmate whom I was clearly infatuated with that I was attracted to her. She was a bit taken back by that and I later learned that that was about the only thing we shouldn’t say as even that could be like bait to see if the other has interest and could start an attraction. I was told by Dandy that I was very gruff. That I stomped around the campground like I was angry. I was not. I was simply serious natured.

Then I recall in a camp ground by St. Girardeau with my group, we received some very serious communication from Bo and Peep to be in our silence and to focus on bringing in and being ready for the next step in our progress into membership in the Next Level. Several days later it was announced that Peep called off any additional meetings. The harvest was officially ended she said. We would all be gathering together from wherever we all were around the country.

It was July and it was 3 1/2 years to the day from when Bo and Peep left Houston, Texas on January 1st 1973 to set out as the Two Witnesses.

And things were really about to change now.

Chapter 6 – The Cocoon – an Out of this World Accelerated Experiential Overcoming Process Begins

Situated about halfway between Cheyenne and Laramie, Wyoming was the Veedavou National Forest, a huge stretch of uninhabited territory dotted by small pine trees, huge majestic rock formations dispersed within a rolling high desert. It had it’s own mystique while showing the harshness of the environment – high winds, well below zero winter temperatures, lots of snow and besides the winter, low in precipitation.

Each group while on the road had “group leaders” who maintained communications with the group traveling with Bo and Peep. Now that we were all in one area, these continued to be a point partnership for organizational purposes but they were called “Helpers”. They were not our leaders. They were simply helping Bo and Peep manage the newly formed organization.

These Helpers were available if group members needed help with something. They would come and go and didn’t inform us of what they were up to. It wasn’t our business. We had our daily chores around the camp. We didn’t mingle really, not within our group, nor with other groups. We mostly worked within our partnership unless we had a need or wanted to offer service to the Helpers. They in a sense were stand in’s for our Teachers being they were our most immediate “link” to Bo and Peep and they didn’t have as much time as we did to take care of their daily needs because they had tasks to do in relationship to their job as group “helpers” so we could offer to help them, be it to cook food of do their laundry or whatever we might think of. This entire endeavor was not a social experience. When not engaged in chores, but not excluded from chores, we spent our time “tuning into” our relationship to the Next Level, seeking to quite our thoughts and seeking to change the things about ourselves that we needed to learn in order to become acceptable to the Next Level. The problem at this point was not knowing what was not acceptable to the Next Level but over time that would be clarified therefore sometimes not having much to do, was a lesson step, to take it all in rather than constantly occupy ourselves with chores and thoughts.

My First major Lesson: Keep my focus on myself – As Jesus said – Remove the log in your own eye before seeking to remove the twig in another’s eye.

Three or four days into our stay in Veedavou Bo and Peep came to each camp and spent a few minutes with each partnership privately. We simply sat in a car with them, Dandy and I. They asked us if we had any questions. Dandy was a bit shy so looked to me. I looked at Peep and noticed she appeared to wearing eye liner which I thought odd. After all, I thought makeup was for women that wanted to enhance their appearance and certainly not for someone on such a spiritual type endeavor as we were at that point fully engaged. So I asked, why Peep was wearing eye makeup. Peep replied, “it’s none of your business”, to which I was taken back. It was a strong response said with all seriousness. She certainly wasn’t hesitant to offend me, not that she intended to offend me. She just answered my question honestly. I looked over at Bo and he was smiling. He then said, was there anything else we wanted to ask them. I didn’t have any further questions so we left the car and another partnership entered the car.

Years later I learned that Peep sought to look “normal” when interacting with humans which for a woman in her late 40’s at the time entailed what she wore and how she kept her hair and how her face looked. She also had large somewhat bulging eyes that she felt make her look odd to people that entered into their pre-judgment of her something she found ineffective in communication. Bo spoke to the classroom once about that incident many years after it occurred and explained Peep’s position in this regard. Appearances mean a great deal to human beings, pre-judging one another by our looks, often doing so automatically. I did not and still don’t realize the extent of this. Peep knew it well so sought to compromise – blending in while de-emphasizing her more distracting to others’ features.

I learned a good lesson right then and there. These were not Pollyanna teachers. They were not afraid of turning away students and were not feeling like they owed us explanations that were not pertinent to the task at hand. What did Peep’s appearance have to do with my “overcoming process” to be acceptable to Next Level membership – the whole reason I was committed to the effort they were the instigators of.

Dandy, left the car and was like “phew…that was intense” and it was clear I had been blatant and my normal bull in a china shop kind of person who had little restraint. Bo and Peep never spoke to me about that though there were many lessons to come that somewhat addressed this same unbridled enthusiasm that bordered arrogance.

The helpers would meet with their group once a day at most to relay Bo and Peep’s instructions which mostly surrounded our daily care of ourselves and our environment. We were not to put things off that needed doing, keeping ourselves and our environments neat and orderly. Lacking showers and having limited water we were instructed to start each day with a sponge bath, taking turns using the tent for privacy. We’d heat a small amount of water, use a washcloth to wet our bodies, use a little soap but not so much that it took a lot of water to rinse off. Water wasn’t plentiful. The entire group organized a “water run” daily where approx. 45 5 gallon water jugs were taken to an agreed upon water source out of the forest to fill up. We’d do our own laundry in a basin each tent was provided and we’d keep the groups camp neat and orderly while staying hidden among the trees so not to alert the Forest rangers to how long we were there. There was officially a two week limit, though we certainly stretched the rule. Fires were not allowed in that time of year and we did not come and go unless we had a reason which would be cleared through the Helpers of each group. For instance, if we were bored we didn’t just up and go to town to get a pizza. It was quite clear that there was a chain of command in this respect.

At this point there were no dietary standards. We were given funds and times to go to town to buy supplies. Two or three partnerships would carpool to town.

One day the Helpers returned from a morning meeting with Bo and Peep and we were told to all pile into cars and intermittently leave the forest, so not to arouse attention and head to Laramie some 40 miles to the west, specifically to a particular hall on the University of Wyoming’s campus.

Somehow, as strange as it seemed Bo and Peep had secured the use of a classroom so we could meet and see and hear Bo and Peep better. It was a small lecture hall and Bo and Peep presided over the meeting. There were 98 of us that had survived the 9 1/2 months of mayhem scattered around the country. Ron and Robert and Judy and Greg who I left Oregon with were no longer in the group. Tara was still in the group and we said hello but still kept our distance so not to awaken old memories to stir feelings, but that was the way it was, in general between members. We were not a social club. It was more or less strictly business between us, the business of overcoming our humanness, an endeavor I still knew little about but was going to learn a great deal more about soon enough.

Bo and Peep were very pleasant and even humorous. They congratulated us for having made it this far. They spoke of our circumstance, the practical aspects of being a sizable group living in the forest and wanting to stay as long as we could. They addressed much of what had been instigated by each groups Helpers re: hygiene and care and the order of our camp, our cars and such. And they answered questions. Apparently they had shared a great deal more information over the months Dandy and I were on our own hitchhiking all over. They spoke about discarnates what were referred to as “influences”. They said when a human died they become a discarnate yet they continue to enact the same behaviors, likes, dislikes they had established while in a body, though lacking a body, they had no other recourse than to enact it through those who still had a body. In some cases for the things they did alone, they continued to do them whether that was to mow the lawn of course in mind only or run in the park. For the things they did with others they sought out others to do them with whether to have sex or to engage in conversation or debate or to be on a baseball team. Those in bodies were not aware of these influences and might have the idea – I think I’ll call Joe to see if we can organize a ball game. That idea could have been their own or could have been a discarnate seeking that activity. In this way, discarnates provided humans with lots of ideas and even their power of execution. In other words their attention and proximity in and around our brain added to our own force of effort. With more of these influences we might feel more and more motivated to certain activity and even thinking. Say you were seeking political office and discarnates witnessed the attention you were getting – holding rallies and attending fund raisers, giving speeches, some discarnates who sought the limelight would gravitate to these and their presence in energy and ideas, answers to questions and so on in a real sense beef one up – fills them with a greater capacity, what we often think of as charisma.

They said that one large aspect of our job was to rid ourselves of these human level helpers. They were not bad to have while in pursuit of human level activity and goals – to have a career, a family, a beautiful home, lots of entertainment and such. But if one is attempting to depart the human kingdom, they need to give these influences their walking papers as their desires can only hinder someone’s completion of the metamorphic process that can result in becoming a butterfly, what they said was akin to Jesus Christing or christening – completion of the metamorphic process as demonstrated by Jesus at what was described to us in the gospels as his transfiguration.

They spoke of the Next Level more. One interesting idea they touched upon was that in the universe there are many forms of service to the Next Level. There are some creatures that serve by being living transport devices for other beings just like someone on the human level might serve their community by being a bus driver. They said there were living space crafts that were intelligent and enjoying of serving by transporting others to tasks they needed to perform. Their service was no less or greater than any other and they were not limited to that service for eternity. They would have continuous opportunity to aspire to whatever they wanted. Some they said aspired to work in Headquarters which is where they had come from. In Headquarters one department entails making membership an option for human equivalents on garden planets like earth as they come to their ripened time evidenced by human or human equivalents desiring more than what the Earth can offer, having that sense of there being more and not able to fit in or seeing through much of the contradiction and primitive behaviors of garden occupants. When some are beginning to reach this stage, the Next Level can read it and provides them help in the form of new information pertaining to the reality of the Next Level and how to move closer to it’s membership. This occurs in conjunction with the Next Level sending “gardeners” into the fields who bring more of their Next Level mind with them to deposit into the Earth atmosphere that provides all more opportunity to perceive more and more, lifting more and more out of any Dark Ages. Knowledge is increased by the presence of these members of the next level who enter as discarnates but are not limited as discarnates are. They seek the vehicle they prepped beforehand for their mission and start a relationship with it, to at an appointed time “take it over” and use it to locate those potential new members to bring them up another notch in their overall schooling that leads to their Earth graduation. They explained that they were here to take those who have exhibited the desire and wherewithal to complete their lessons to result in their membership in the Next Level which would be their next evolutionary step above human where they would no longer die or circulate among humans but would be beginning a new life everlasting in a non-decaying environment that was engaged in the service of all of creation to include the nurturing of yet new potential members of the Next Level.

We began to have meetings with Bo and Peep in that classroom every week or so where they would bring examples of how members had acted in certain circumstances and answer our questions. It was mainly so we wouldn’t rouse suspicion from the Forest rangers as who this large group was and whether it was time for them to move on.

REVERENCE:

In one lesson, they explained that we were far too casual about how we approached one another and that we needed a great deal more respect, restraint and realistic REVERENCE. For instance, say a partnership (we did everything as a two or threesome) had a need to talk to another partnership. How would they go about it. Would they just walk into another’s tent site area and knock on the tent to get their attention? No. If the other partnership was in their tent then we didn’t approach them unless we had specific instructions from Bo and Peep and/or through Helpers to do so. If it was clear that other partnership were out and about – active, then we would approach but stop when we reached eyeshot of those we were approaching. Those receiving us would acknowledge that it was a good time to communicate, with a glance, otherwise if they ignored us then we would not bother them and would try again later. This came up in regards to Bo and Peep where some Helpers wanted to ask them a question. Bo and Peep were outside their tent area cooking on their camp stove. The approaching partnership just walked up to them and thereby forced Bo and Peep to give them the attention they wanted. It was wrong in this circumstance to assume Bo and Peep could be interrupted as it appeared they were just fixing a meal. Little did they know, that Bo and Peep were regularly in a type of connection or seeking of connection – “tuning in” as we called it to their “helpers” outside their visible environment and that forcing them to turn their attention to us was forcing them to take their attention off their “older members”, not a casual think to do. Bo and Peep said this was a normal human thing to do, like knocking on someone’s door or ringing them on the phone, thinking little about interrupting their mental concentration which could have also been engaged on working out a problem. The Next Level way was to extend the ultimate respect for another. Lacking an emergency it was to show your presence and when you know they knew you were making your desire for attention known, if they acknowledged you, approach, otherwise come back another time and/or repeat the request. We were to practice this with each other not just between us and our teachers, representative of older and younger members of the Next Level. It wasn’t so much that they couldn’t’ be interrupted. It was more about not assuming what we have on our mind is more important than what they have on theirs and that no matter what someone appeared to be doing – menial tasks of cooking or cleaning it didn’t mean that a great deal of important things were not happening on their minds that we could not see.

Practicing this with one another seemed so special. It was truly reverent and it also put more responsibility on others to recognize another’s need to communicate so someone with a genuine need were not put in the position of having to be pushy to get another’s attention.

The “A” tone:

Bo and Peep gave us a tool, they said would aid us in “tuning” our minds. They brought in tuning forks for each group that we shared. It was in the key of A. I never knew whether that was because those were the most available tuning forks or whether they specifically sought that tone for this exercise but we were instructed to sort of memorize that note – sing it, hum it and check that we are learning it by using the tuning fork to check our tonal memory.

Partner Change:

At one point we were reassigned partners. I became partner with a female named Check. She was one of the 39 who laid down their lives in 1997. She was one that came from Canada, who met up with the group while we camped in Boulder. I had grown accustomed to Dandy and she to me. Our effectiveness in helping one another discover the areas we needed to gain control of had diminished. It never was that good to begin with. One time Dandy had told me I was like a bull in a china shop the way I tromped around the camp. I sought to be more refined in my movements after that. At another point before arriving at Veedavou Bo and Peep suggested if we have anything to say to any member of our group to clear the air or to seek help with, we should do so. I told June a young woman who joined pregnant and arranged to deliver the baby to a family in Arkansas who wanted the child. June was also one who laid down her life in 1997. I told her I found her attractive and therefore distracting or something like that. It took some guts to tell her that. I was embarrassed and I wasn’t coming on to her at all. I had no intention of going back to the behavior I’d left behind. I thought I was being honest. As it turned out this was one area Bo and Peep preferred we not indulge because of how it stimulates the vehicle and puts thoughts out there that can become bothersome to others. I don’t know if June ever dealt with knowing how I felt. I remained very attracted to her while in the group, though I kept it under control and tried not to focus or have thoughts in this regard. I slipped plenty in this discipline but overall I did not enter into any fantasies so I guess I did okay.

So now I was with a new partner, also a fairly by my estimation attractive young woman so there was chemistry automatically there which would provide for difficult communication – usually surfacing as being a little too nice or unhelpful. We were supposed to point out in one another anything we thought was unbecoming of a member of the Next Level. We were knew at this but still tried and Bo and Peep would learn about what we said to one another and correct us if we were barking up a wrong tree in criticizing another.

Exercise of Silence:

Simultaneous to this partner change was an extended exercise in not talking. We didn’t know how long it would last but there was to be no talking at all. We could write a note to one another if we absolutely had to. It wasn’t easy agreeing on what food to cook. That was the hardest thing I guess because along with not talking we were trying to not be aggressive with our way. We were seeking to do what the other thought best. So we used gestures and often just nodded yes even if we didn’t want to so we could proceed. It was like if you said no to someone, it was like demonstrating that you had a strong preference for things to be a certain way, and this we were trying to deprogram from ourselves. Flexibility was important in this regard so it was hard to say no yet if we really felt another decision was best we had to say no and then gesture something else. It was awkward. Bo and Peep eventually after a few days and reports galore on how things were going to include some meetings where we could voice problems said we could say Yes, No or I don’t know and could use key words. So if you wanted eggs for breakfast one could say to their partner whom we were supposed to do everything with, short of personal hygiene and bathroom chores, “Eggs?”

Securing our Environment – Camp Borders to keep out discarnates:

Next Bo and Peep instigated a mindset and practice that had to do with discarnates – human level spirits who were no longer incarnate – out of body – spirits. They said we needed to keep our minds clear and part of doing that was by keeping foreign thoughts that these discarnates were thought to be the originators of out of our camp. Since we had no walls, we designed imaginary walls assisted by sticks – branches that had fallen off trees that we laid all around the perimeter of each camp touching one another and whenever we felt the urge members of each group would walk that perimeter telling the discarnates to stay out – talking out loud or in our heads. They encouraged us to talk to the discarnates out loud at times because this fortified their reality to our own vehicle. Our bodies were thought to be our suits of clothes that has it’s own mind, own habits, own likes and dislikes. We were the commander, that is if we didn’t always do what the body wanted and when it wanted to do it. We were to take full control over our vehicles – that is in mind and body. Bo and Peep explained that we were not responsible for what thoughts we have but only for what we chose to entertain. If we had a thought of a sensual/sexual nature, we could allow it to linger and grow into another and another and even a daydream or vision but that would increasingly stimulate the vehicle in this way and would be harder to stop. We were given the expression “nip it in the bud” – sense that thought even before it registers in your head and cut it off, put up a blank card, turn your attention elsewhere – whatever it took to not go down that path that gets harder and harder to reverse once entered. This discipline also pertained to those who were highly critical of others, easily brought to anger, fantasizing, playing out scenarios of fun or popularity or fame or even a better world. Bo and Peep wanted us to be so in the moment that we consciously instructed our bodies every step, every movement. It was a practice of being in total control, not doing anything on automatic.

I would walk the perimeter and in this case could do so without my partner though before doing so would ask of motion to my partner if I could walk a bit. We asked about everything. “Is it a good time to use the rest room?” with one key word/phrase, “rest room?”. Most times a partner would say yes to this one but at times they might remember that there was water boiling that they were supposed to take care of, so would say…”water?” and I’d get the hint and take care of my job and then go to the rest room, which by the way was the woods. We dug holes for solid waste. It was a big national forest and these were not prepared campgrounds. It was as rough as could be. We used leaves for paper, though if we had paper we’d bury it too.

So I’d be walking along the stick perimeter which was also thought of as our space craft and I’d say. Discarnates – get out of here. This is our craft and we wish to be left alone. Go somewhere else please but if we heard a thought that persisted be it the past or someone in the past we had certain attachment to or desire for a chocolate cake or to take a drive or to be sexual or whatever we could if we wanted get stronger and even angry building force to let these discarnates know we meant business. But we didn’t have to get mad. These discarnates were thought of as often helpful to humans. They attach or tag along with humans when the humans do the things they liked to do when they were in a vehicle and often times they help humans do things. A discarnate that when in a vehicle liked to run or jog might hang out where people with bodies jog and will all but enter another’s vehicle to experience whatever they can, which we thought amounted to the energy from the effort, like a heat or pulse that they get increased vibe from, thus in a sense feed off of. If it was a discarnate that loved to be a manager of others, say at the corporation they ran, then they would continue to hang around the new corporate board room and assist whoever they want with their duties, reminding them of things that need to be done and giving ideas of new things to try. The human will think they originated the thought – “had an idea” while it often is a discarnate. This could become so dramatic that those humans with lots of popularity for whatever reason could have a literal entourage of discarnates traveling around with them boosting their ego, giving them confidence, helping with whatever it was that they became successful at. It was thought that this was why when some people would walk into a room, one felt an enormous presence. It may very well be that they do represent an enormous presence, their body and who knows how many discarnates building them up and taking the energy that comes from their doing what they like to do most that this human body was active in.

The Smooth Whirlwind:

The next exercise Bo and Peep instigated was called the Whirlwind or something like that. We changed partners every day and did so with other groups. There were about 7 or 8 groups of about 12 in a group at this point. We even built pathways with sticks connecting groups that were sometimes as much as 100 yards apart. So each morning after daily clean up chores – which entailed a sponge bath in our tent and shaving for the guys and brushing of teeth, we’d have our next partner assignment as provided by each groups helpers and off we go, switching and doing it all silently. We each had one bag to carry all our personal belongings, sleeping bag and such. One partner would stay put and receive the new partner to their tent while one would go to a new tent. It was very, very interesting and challenging because it showed how each person did things a little differently and interacted a little differently and how chemistry played such a strong role in communication and how much help we were willing to offer another.

A funny thing that was happening in many tents was the making of fudge. We got to learn who made the best fudge and this whirlwind continued so that we ended up being with most every person in the group and some twice. It was all most interesting when we’d go to town, at an agreed day and time for each group so not to make a big scene leaving or returning to the camp, to get supplies. We’d continue the no talking and would just nod approval or not at each food item. Most of us have strong preferences when it comes to food and this became a source of how flexible we were willing to be while not imposing our likes on another. There were no food guidelines from Bo and Peep at this point and most gravitated to the same things and our budget was not huge – provided to us by the group helpers who received it from Bo and Peep.

Bo and Peep were also camping but no one but the 7 or 8 helper partnerships knew their location. As I’ve said the Helpers would go meet with them every morning to get new instructions if there were any. At this time Helpers would pass along their observations of the group members. Talking was permitted if we needed to report something to the group Helpers and we could do so without our partner if necessary though that was discouraged, but if it was about our partner we needed to seek help at times without them. For instance a number of females said I looked angry at them at times and they didn’t know why. So Helpers would come to me and tell me of this observation. They didn’t take sides. They would preface that “if the shoe fits”, in other words, examine the observation. If you don’t think there is merit to it, then simply catalog the observation, but if you can see what the other is saying, seek to change that behavior. Of course Helpers also had their difficulties, though they weren’t in the whirlwind. Bo and Peep needed dependable help and these helpers were usually those whom they had worked the most with in that capacity for the 9 1/2 months we as a group were offering what we had to the public.

I was envious of the Helpers. They seemed to have greater stature, but I soon learned they didn’t. In fact in my group, as it turned out the Helpers had a sexual encounter. I didn’t learn who was involved until years later. However, there was a meeting called by Bo and Peep when one of the members confessed it to them and it was a major shakeup of the group. Bo and Peep were adamant that this was not a game. If anyone wanted to have sex then they should leave the group – it wasn’t for them and there was no time to waste. I also heard that someone smoked some pot in one group and Bo and Peep found out and had the same kind of meeting saying this was not appropriate behavior for someone seeking to engage their full energy, full strength, full mind, body and soul to taking control of their body and all it’s desires to “overcome” it’s animal nature to be the best applicant of Next Level membership they could be. It was the same for alcohol use if there was any or smoking tobacco or any entertainment based activity. We were only to do what we were instructed to do or we don’t want to be in the program, what we called, “The Process”. Food as entertainment would be dealt with later on as it was not as clearly entertainment.

At some point after these events a few decided to leave the group. neither of those who had some degree of sex left at that time. One did leave some years later the male member who instigated the sex. The member in the female vehicle exposed what she participated in many years later when Do encouraged the students to come clean with anything we knew we were attempting to not participate in. I was a little shocked by it as she was a “Helper” in my group at that time and I did look up to the “Helpers” as they had a closer and more regular interface with Ti and Do. I later learned that that did not really mean they were my elders or were further along or even closer or more loved by the Teachers. In fact as it turned out most that were in that “helper” role then and thereafter ended up leaving the classroom, perhaps because it did build their ego to have that “special” role so that translated to thinking of themselves as “special” to where when they weren’t in that role, as the roles did change, they felt let down and demoted and less important and special. Many were faced with this kind of struggle and many left rather than overcome it.

At one point, I ended up in a threesome partnership with two other male members. That was very interesting and challenging. We ended up discontinuing the strict no talking. We’d experienced it for nearly 3 months so Bo and Peep said we could give it a break but not to go back to chatting like chatterboxes. However I recall lying on my sleeping bag, next to my partners, two guys about my same age – 20’s and we were talking about stuff and discarnates. We tried not to talk of the past, but occasionally someone would refer to something in their past and the other partners were supposed to say something but then would feel like they didn’t want to make waves or find fault with the other so might be permissive of it and even might fall into doing the same thing. This may have been one of those times but somehow we started talking about discarnates and to all three of our surprise we at the same time felt this overwhelming presence and it felt very strong and very dark – evil – whatever you want to call it. We were scared seriously by it and said to one another, we’re never going to talk like this again. Apparently we were challenging the discarnates to show themselves while not being that convinced that they really existed and wammo, something changed and all three of us knew there was a reality to it.

Don’t Challenge discarnates:

This led to a lesson when it was reported by us to our helpers that reported it to Bo and Peep, that we should not challenge discarnates. We don’t need to try to make it harder than it is. We don’t want to intimidate them as they will take it as a challenge if they would have done so while in a vehicle and you will have a more difficult time keeping your thoughts under control and not off into some human activity, when you need all your energy to stay on the straight and narrow.

Here is another section that has to do with why I left the classroom:

https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2015/04/09/does-sawyer-regret-leaving-ti-and-dos-heavens-gate-classroom/

tonight radio 9-11pm et on revelations and daniel references to bush and obama and more

January 9, 2014

tonight I rant away again – 9-11pm et and this time I’m going to have to give some time to prophecy of bush and Obama presidencies from revelations and Daniel. Call in at: 656-478-5618 (no fee to call beyond your phone fees) to listen and/or talk or log in to chat or just go to the show to listen only at: http://www.blogtalkradio.com/sawyer . Also a little more about the hitler/Nazi links to Ant and Uncle Artica lol and l inside too.

Inet radio broadcast tonight 9-11pm ET 1/5/2014 (podcast provided for later listening) focus on new Russian documentary

January 6, 2014

THIS IS NOT AN ATTEMPT TO HAVE FOLLOWERS OR TO SELL ANYTHING IN ANY SHAPE OR FORM. I don’t need followers to do what I do. It’s strictly providing a “shingle” that states that there is a huge story to be told about the real Ti and Do, known as the leaders of what became known as the Heaven’s Gate group.

I will be focusing on this newly released with English subtitles Russian documentary on my internet radio broadcast tonight 1/5/2014 from 9-11pm ET, that’s Extraterrestrial time lol. You can call into the show to listen and/or to talk at: 646-478-5618 and/or go to www.blogtalkradio.com/sawyer to listen and/or if logging in to observe any chat and/or to participate in it.

In the documentary in the link below there are many points and interviews that make a viable case describing an emergence of space aliens by 1946/47 when Admiral Byrd reports encountering objects that “could fly from pole to pole at incredible speeds.” There is a great deal of information in the documentary not covered in this little blurb below the link:

http://link.examiner.com/507ad24cdc87ac0b4f48d9e552c700c07332c11c0400000e/UiarIMJSf1i_c5sZAe401

October 25, 2012

An extraordinary 2006 Russian documentary was very recently translated into English revealing new information about a US Navy Antarctica expedition in 1946/47. Originally scheduled for a six month period, the “scientific” expedition was officially called “The United States Navy Antarctic Development Program,” and given the operational name Highjump. The naval component of Operation Highjump was known as Task Force 68 and comprised 4700 military personnel, one aircraft carrier (the USS Philippine Sea among the largest of all carriers of the time), and number of naval support ships and aircraft. The Naval expedition was headed by famed polar explore Admiral Richard Byrd, who had been ordered to: “to consolidate and extend American sovereignty over the largest practical area of the Antarctic continent.” Byrd’s expedition ended after only 8 weeks with “many fatalities” according to initial news reports based on interviews with crew members who spoke to the press while passing through Chilean ports. Rather than deny the heavy casualty reports, Admiral Byrd revealed in a press interview that Task Force 68 had encountered a new enemy that “could fly from pole to pole at incredible speeds.”